Home

Panasonic DMR-BS750 Blu-ray Disc Recorder

1. Delete All Delete all items registered on the copying list 1 Press A V to select Delete All then press OK 2 Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Add Add new items to the copying list 1 Press A V to select Add then press OK 2 Press A V lt gt to select the still picture or folder then press HI A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary items e Press II again to cancel 3 Press OK Delete Delete the selected items 1 Press A V to select Delete then press OK 2 Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Cancel all registered copying setting and lists After performing steps gt 74 Copying using the copying list Press A V to select Cancel All then press OK O Press lt 4 to select Yes then press OK e The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations When a title still picture etc has been recorded or deleted at the copy source When steps have been taken for instance to turn off the unit open the tray change the copy direction etc Select another folder After performing step 1 gt left Register with By Picture Date Album Picture 4 Press OPTION 2 Press OK 3 Press A V lt gt to select the folder then press OK The still pictures of differen
2. A Y to select current programme then Gr Millions 4000 FilmFour lovie WED 19 08 2009 13 00 15 10 Q A Y to select View then Selecting a channel without using TV Guide To select desired channel Press A V CH To directly enter channels You can also select channels with the numbered buttons e g 1517 1 gt 5 gt 1 504 5 gt 0 gt 4 N f RQT9430 INPUT SELECT Tips To show Digital TEXT MHEG and subtitles gt 91 To select or change Multi Audio AD gt 90 Multi Audio AD To register the channel to Favourites gt 97 Notes e The TV Guide list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done e Channel number is indicated on the unit s display as an example FS151 Watching Television of the Other Satellite Service To view or record free channels from other satellite services There are no programme guides for these channels Only the channel list is available Selecting a channel with the channel list This unit can receive and record digital satellite channels Preparation Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is connected to Important This unit has only digital satellite tuners Q Q to turn the unit on 2 EN a few times and select Other Sat 2 uan C 2 All Other Sat Channels So
3. scum S The episode to be recorded R Repeat programme Programme for which you set the timer recording HD programme To cancel the series timer recording programme 1 Press A V lt gt to select the programme the timer icon is displayed then press OK 2 While Delete is selected press OK 3 Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK The timer icon disappears All programmes of the same series you select to cancel will be cancelled at the same time Notes e f the unit cannot record the first run the unit will record the repeat programme if it is available However this unit will not record the repeat programme if any part of the first run is recorded e The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode of the series for 13 weeks e You cannot set series timer recording for the repeat programmes of the series that you have already set series timer recording To cancel a timer recording in progress Select the programme you want to cancel in advance when you record 2 programmes simultaneously While the unit is on STOP rH Confirmation screen appears lt to select Yes then n 2 Notes Recording stops and the timer programme is deleted Daily weekly and series timer programmes remain and timer recording will start from the next time the timer recording is set Auto Renewal Recording Th
4. ay OK P oreu Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR Editing Playlist Q While stopped When MUSIC is not selected press the Yellow button to select MUSIC Y to select Playlists then Edit the track in the playlist Press A V to select the playlist then press OK Press A V to select the track then press OPTION e g while selecting the track in playlist Remove __ 7 gt below Add to Playlist gt left Edit Track Name gt 80 Edit Artist l5 Properties gt 79 D Edit the playlist Press A V to select the playlist then press OPTION e g while selecting playlist Remove All Tracks IF gt below Edit Playlist Name A Y to select item then Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR Playlist operation Music After performing step gt above Editing Playlist Remove All Tracks Remove all tracks in the selected playlist Tracks themselves are not deleted from the HDD Press lt gt to select Remove then press OK Selected track is removed Track itself is not deleted from the HDD Remove Press lt gt to select Remove then press OK Edit Playlist Name _
5. To perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording 1 programme out of the 2 needs to be recorded to the HDD in DR mode Notes 2 programmes simultaneous recording is not possible in following conditions 2 programmes from the external input While recording from DV input or executing Recording via AV3 input While high speed copying RQT9430 Specifying the Recording Time This operation will only record from the tuner to HDD in DR mode This function allows specifying the length of recording time up to 4 hours During recording REC on the main unit repeatedly until the desired time is reached The recording time and the unit s display change as follows cous Cancel OFF 0 30 gt OFF 1 00 OFF 4 00 OFF 1 30 ___ OFF 3 00 lt OFF 2 00 Notes e This function does not work during timer recording e Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press W e The unit turns off automatically after recording finished e When recording from external equipment you can select the recording mode from XP SP LP EP gt 65 Direct TV Recording This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV without having to change the channels on this unit e You can use the function when you connect the unit to a Q Link compatible TV using the 21 pin Scart cable Whe
6. is not enough space on the first layer to record a programme 3 Each time you press A V the time A the remainder is recorded on the second layer When playing a increases A or decreases Y by 1 minute a title recorded on both layers the unit automatically switches 2 intervals between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal S Press and hold A or V for 10 minute programme However video and audio may momentarily cut out a intervals when the unit is switching layers When switching layers Video and audio may momentarily cut Except DivX Second recordable layer Skips approx 1 minute forward with each press The available space f MANUAL SKIP First recordable layer During playback Title 1 Title 2 _ Inner Playback direction ree section of of the disc Create Chapters the disc m a Ein GM DVD R DL When creating chapters in your favourite scenes you R DL can easily reach the head of scene using Ke lt P SKIP or play on Chapter View gt 56 CREATE During playback HAPTER Tips Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby gt 64 47 RQT9430 Playback of the High Definition Video AVCHD and playlists Playback of the High Definition Video AVCHD It is possible to playback the high definition video AVCHD recorded on the Panasonic s video camera etc on the disc or SD card
7. c eee eeaeee gt 32 41 76 83 Basic operations for recording and play Show the digital satellite channel information gt 90 Programme information within TV Guide screen gt 48 Show status MESSAGES eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees gt 91 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR Pop up Menu TOP MENU secs fetes svasined e a dete gt 26 45 Selection OK Frame by frame cccecceeeees gt 13 47 Show OPTION menu Use Colour buttons according to on screen instructions for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen for TV Guide operations disactivating timer programme for selecting programme category for editing favourites Recording function REC Start recordi geran nnne gt 27 REC MODE Change recording Mode eeseeeeereeeereeeetees gt 64 EXT LINK Linked timer recordings with external equipment gt 64 DIRECT TV REC Direct TV recording gt 37 Show Digital TEXT MHEG Teletext service gt 91 Show Subtitles ee eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees gt 91 Transmission window TV operations eerie srir gt 108 Channel select Change pages in the TV Guide system eeeceeeeeteeeeeeteeeteeeeetees gt 24 27 43 Show VIERA CAST cccccccsecseetecsssseesseseeseeeesesees gt 85 Input select freesat Other Sat AV1 AV2 AV3 AV4 DOW esi Svea betas cag tSuncwdvnacte ewissdushcessaenaysevee
8. Plays DivX video DivX is a registered trademark of DivX Inc and is used under license YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google Inc freesat is a registered trademark and the freesat logo is a trademark of Freesat UK Ltd x v Colour is a trademark Gracenote Corporate Description Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com Gracenote Proprietary Legends CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2009 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2009 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote g gracenote Gracenote End User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW This application or device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote
9. Starting of timer recording possible during the following operations Starting of timer recording not possible during the following operations e Recording the title e Playing the title e Editing the title e Copying a title in high speed mode without finalising creating top menu Only 1 programme can be recorded e Executing DV Automatic Recording e Executing Recording via AV3 input e Executing Pause Live TV 1 Executing operation will terminate when 2 programmes simultaneous recording cannot be performed 2 Playback of disc stops when a timer recording in recording mode other than DR has started 3 Executing operation will be terminated e Copying a title in normal speed mode e Copying a title in high speed mode with finalising creating top menu e Copying HD Video AVCHD format e Editing still pictures or music e Copying still pictures e Copying music e Formatting e Finalising Creating Top Menu Eid 116 RQT9430 Media Disc USB Memory SD Card Handling Inserting Discs Press A OPEN CLOSE to open the tray Insert a disc Insert label up Press A OPEN CLOSE to close the tray Notes e It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other You will need to eject the disc and turn it over Disc with a Cartridge e BD RE with a cartridge cannot be used with this unit It c
10. Page No sound e Check the connections and the Digital Audio Output settings Check the input 103 114 Low volume mode on the amplifier if you have connected one Distorted sound e Check if TV is muted Cannot hear the desired audio type Check if amplifier is muted e Sound is not output while fast forwarding during chasing playback and simultaneous record and playback e Turn Sound Effects in the Sound menu to Off in the following cases 89 When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs When playing bilingual broadcast programmes e Audio may not be output due to how files were created DivX e The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal e Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables Reduce the number of connected devices e To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable set HDMI 105 Audio Output to On in the Setup menu e Depending on the connected equipment the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable e When BD Video Secondary Audio is set to On Dolby Digital Plus Dolby 103 TrueHD and DTS HD are converted to 48 kHz Dolby Digital and output In this case set BD Video Secondary Audio to Off Cannot switch audio e You cannot switch the audio in the following cases
11. Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 3 To exit the screen Press EXIT 48 RQTS430 To enjoy the BD Video which supports BONUSVIEW or BD Live What is BONUSVIEW BONUSVIEW allows you to enjoy functions such as picture in picture or secondary audio etc with BD Video supporting BD ROM Profile 1 version 1 1 Final Standard Profile What is BD Live In addition to the BONUSVIEW function BD Video supporting BD ROM profile 2 that has a network extension function allows you to enjoy more functions such as subtitles exclusive images and online games by connecting this unit to the Internet In order to use the Internet feature you must have this unit connected to a broadband network gt 115 e These discs may not be on sale in certain regions e The usable functions and the operating method may vary with each disc please refer to the instructions on the disc and or visit their website Playing secondary video picture in picture and secondary audio Secondary video can be played from a disc compatible with the picture in picture function For the playback method refer to the instructions for the disc Image of the secondary video e g Secondary video Primary video When the secondary video does not display Turn Video and Soundtrack to On in Secondary Video in Signal Type in the Disc menu gt 88 e To output the audio
12. operated after that set VIERA Link to Off Reference RQT9430 Troubleshooting Guide HELEENE Operation Play fails to start even when gt PLAY is pressed Play starts but then stops immediately e Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up e The disc is dirty scratched or marked e You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit e You tried to play a RW that needs to have a top menu created on the equipment used for a e You may be able to copy a One time only recording title that was recorded to DVD RAM using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this units HDD but play is not possible due to copyright protection e When recording to DVD RAM using EP 8 hours mode play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD RAM In this case use EP 6 hours mode e You cannot playback while executing Recording via AV3 input or when recording from the DV input e Make sure that the TV is turned on If the menu or messages are displayed follow the on screen instructions 101 67 Audio and video momentarily pause e This occurs between playlist chapters e This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R R DL and RW that have been copied using the high speed mode e This occurs as scenes change during Quick View Play x1 3 When playing a
13. Insert a disc or SD card A Y to select Play Video AVCHD then e g GM DVD RAM AVCHD Play Video AVCHD Copy Video AVCHD Play Pictures JPEG This disc is play only and cannot be recorded or to OK RETURN e g EX Play Video AVCHD Copy Video AVCHD Copy Video MPEG2 Play Pictures JPEG Copy Pictures JPEG SD card is inserted OK RETURN Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each media If the top menu of the disc or SD card to play was e Created e Not created Display the top menu Display the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen It may not be able to display the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen depending on the equipment used to record A V lt gt to select the title then e g Ea DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen DIRECT NAVIGATOR Video AVCHD ARD VIDEO by No Date Day Time Title Name 6S y AX 001 15 12 SAT 19 36 Fantasista a kes Q 002 07 12 FRI 12 35 2007 12 07 Rec time 00 00 07 v Page 01 01 ox OoPnon Oise voeo Tips To exit the screen Press EXIT To display the top menu Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR When the top menu or DIRECT NAVIGATOR is not displayed Refer to Direct Play gt 46 to playback Operation during play gt 45 to 47 Advanced Play
14. Notes Changed settings remain intact even when switching the unit to standby mode Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 9 To exit the screen Press EXIT gt left Accessing the Setup Menu All factory default settings are indicated with Underlined text A V select Tuning gt OKs freesat Favourites Edit freesat Channel List Other Satellite Tuning Menu Signal Condition Child Lock Preferred Multi Audio Preferred Subtitles freesat Favourites Edit You can create Favourites of freesat channels for making viewing and recording easier Editing Favourites does not affect the channel setting itself Favourites Editor 101 BBC 1 Wales 102 BBC Two Wales 103 ITV1 Wales 104 S4C Digidol 105 Five 106 BBC THREE Favourites 107 BBC FOUR 108 BBC HD Channel RETURN l E Add Addall E Press A V to select freesat Favourites Edit and then press OK l Dai recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites during timer recording standby e Channel numbers cannot be changed due to broadcast restrictions To add channels to Favourites 1 Press A V to select the channel in the All freesat Channels column to add then press the Green button e Repeat this step to add other channels e Press the Yellow button to add all the available channels to
15. When the recording mode is XP and Audio Mode for XP Recording is set to LPCM 103 When Recording Format for DVD is set to Video format The default 101 setting is Video format e You have used a digital connection Set Dolby D Dolby D Dolby TrueHD 103 DTS DTS HD or MPEG to PCM or connect using audio cables analogue connection e There are discs whose audio cannot be changed due to how the disc was created USB Page The contents of the USB memory e Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again If this cannot be read does not solve the problem turn off and turn on the unit again e Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly 117 e The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the 23 135 unit The contents on the USB memory may be damaged e The USB memory contains a folder structure and or file extensions that are 136 not compatible with this unit e Turn off and then turn on the unit again e USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may not be recognized by this unit e Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit 23 e If inserted during playback recording or copying etc the USB memory may not be recognized by this unit e You can use USB memories with capacities up to 128 GB e Turn the power of this unit off once and turn it back on If it cannot be 105 USB memory cannot be operated
16. e DVD RAM that cannot be removed from their cartridges e 2 6 5 2 GB DVD RAM 12 cm Types of disc for the type of connected TV When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC or playback a title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC refer to this table O Possible to view Impossible to view 22 3 95 4 7 GB DVD R for Authoring DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW R R DL recorded on another unit and not finalised gt 138 BD Video with a region code other than B DVD Video with a region number other than 2 or ALL DVD Audio HD DVD DVD ROM R 8 cm CD ROM CDV CD G Photo CD CVD SVCD SACD MV Disc PD Video CD etc RQT9430 E Multi system TV i 2 PAL fe PALIN NTSC O 1 PAL60 PAL NTSC TV NTSC Ow 1 Select PAL6O in NTSC Video Output gt 102 If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525 60 signals the picture will not be shown correctly x2 Select NTSC in TV System gt 104 e When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD ensure that you match the TV System setting to the disc or title PAL or NTSC gt 104 USB Memory and Card Handling USB memories you can use on this unit USB memories can only be used for playback or copy to HDD or discs USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class and digital cameras that use PTP protocol USB memories that support USB 1 0 1 1 and
17. e If converted to the HG HX HE or HL mode an image of the aspect ratio 4 3 becomes the aspect ratio set in Aspect for Recording in the Setup menu gt 101 e Regarding titles recorded from radio service The data size of the title recorded from radio service will be larger after converted for copy It is recommended that you keep them in DR mode Editing RQT9430 Create Playback Edit of the Chapter HDD RAM Creating Playback Editing is possible R RW VR Only playback of chapter is possible Regarding Chapters Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one chapter Title Start we m a Ebi GM You can divide a title into multiple chapters Each section between the division points Chapter Marks becomes a chapter End Title _ _ Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter l J Chapter Mark e The maximum number of items on a disc Depends on the state of recording EDY Approx 1000 per title Epes e EDA GINI Approx 1000 Notes EPP You will not be able to perform the Resume play function gt 26 or Change Thumbnail gt 54 with a title with the maximum number of chapters Gp Chapter Marks created will be maintained when copied or used DR File Conversion But it will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers Create Chapter Mark During the playb
18. neum You now have the opportunity to enter your details and help the police to crack crime See Instruction Book Owner ID Please enter new PIN again to confirm PIN es lt 3 H o PINentry e RETURN S continued on the next page a N mw UU EN Sy Q oo Z Z tO Ze N g ea Quick Start Guide Ka Tips To cancel the Auto Setup Press BACK RETURN 5 To restart the Auto Setup gt 98 freesat Auto Setup To correct the character Press the Red button to delete character one by one You can delete all input characters by pressing the Blue button You can perform this operation in step 6 orG Notes e To initialise all settings gt 107 Shipping Condition e When the below screen appears after step This screen appears when this unit does not detect the connection to DISH IN 2 When you connect DISH IN 1 only press OK then go to step When you connect both DISH IN 1 and 2 turn this unit off and check your connection Then perform from step OQ e The Auto Setup may require a certain length of time RQT9430 Auto Set Up freesat Repeat step to enter PIN again to confirm Owner ID Data Entry PIN 0000 NAME A POSTCODE Select Change re SY e RETURN The Owner ID Data Entry screen appears Make a note of PIN in case you forget it Enter your NAME O Press A V to select
19. then Copy Source HDD 4 Copy Direction HDD BD DVD gt Destination EES 2 Copy Mode ELZETTE Information ofthe copy destination R Create List Bead copied on to disc Start Copying Select the copy direction RETURN Set the copy direction If you are not going to change the copy direction press W gt step Press A V to select Copy Direction then press gt 2 Press A V to select Source then press OK 3 Press A V to select HDD then press OK If you select HDD Destination is automatically set to BD DVD 4 Press A V to select Destination then press OK 5 Press A V to select BD DVD then press OK The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected 6 Press lt to confirm Set the recording mode If you are not going to change the recording mode press W twice gt step OC 4 Press A V to select Copy Mode then press gt 2 Press A V to select Format then press OK 3 Press A V to select VIDEO then press OK 4 Press A V to select Recording Mode then press OK 5 Press A V to select the mode then press OK 6 Press lt to confirm 30 RQT9430 QO Register titles for copy If you are going to copy the registered list without making any change to it pres
20. 1 0 0 cc cee eee 72 Editing still pictures JPEG 0 0 0 e eee eee 72 Still pictures Operation osi essunk stesse krii biska ii 73 Copying still pictures 00 0 e eee eee 74 Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory Copy All Pictlres ci evece ceded ae ek We Hebe eres 74 Copying new still pictures on the SD card Copy New Pictures 0 0 cece cece eee 74 Copying using the copying list 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 74 Deleting still pictures 0 0 0 cece eee 76 i Music Musie O O Playing MUSIC 1 eee 77 Playing MPS filos e sees nessa cee eee ee esa aa 77 Playing MUSIC CDs cean cere ke baw dee etd he kads 77 Playing music recorded on HDD 0 0000000 78 Useful functions during music play 0 0000 79 Editing music playlist 0020 cee 80 Editing MUSIC ziea aea Sed he saci cate pra etaner Eav AUR E ms otra nual 80 Album and track operation 000 0000 2 cee eee 80 Register track to Playlist 0 0 0 cece eee eee 81 Editing Playlists s s ree miya E E E E E 81 Playlist Operations ou canta dee yawns aeons nae tis 81 Copying music to HDD 0 20 eee eee eens 82 About the Gracenote Database 0 00 eee eee ee 82 Copying music from a disc or a USB memory 82 Deleting MUSIC 1 0 cece eee ee 83 Convenient Functions I Others Convenient Functions Entering Text iris cc c
21. Check the current programme e g on the Web site for the TV Guide system provider or station provider The TV Guide data is not updated e Make sure that the time is set correctly Set the clock manually 15 124 RQT9430 Digital satellite broadcast Page freesat Auto Setup cannot be done e Check connections and dish alignment The dish needs to be pointing at Astra completely 2 at 28 2 East and Eurobird 1 at 28 5 East e f the problem persists consult your freesat registered retailer or call Freesat UK Ltd on 0844 881 6700 or visit www freesat co uk freesat channels cannot be e Check the connections 10 11 received e The satellite dish may not be pointing in the direction of the satellite or the direction of the satellite dish may have changed due to strong winds or vibration If problem persists consult your freesat registered dealer e Perform freesat Auto Setup in the Setup menu 98 TV reception worsens after e This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment connecting the unit It can be solved by using a signal booster available from electronics retailers Picture regularly breaks up on Check Signal Condition If Signal Quality or Signal Strength are displayed in red or constantly 98 some channels No Signal changing check satellite dish If probl
22. Copy to Album KA ES Go Copy the selected album date or pictures to an existing album Press lt gt to select Start then OK Press A V lt gt to select the destination album then OK e The destination album with protect setting cannot be copied to e After copying the screen shows the Album View automatically Copy to New Album HDD BD RE RAM Copy the selected album date or pictures to new album Press lt gt to select Start then OK Press OK Press lt gt to select Yes or No then OK e f Yes is selected You can give a name to the album gt 84 Entering Text e f No is selected Date of the first recorded picture in the album becomes the album name automatically If there is no information about the recording date it will become e After copying the screen shows the Album View automatically Copy to Disc HDD Press lt gt to select Start then OK e If you carry out the Copy to Disc insert a disc advance Copy to HDD RAM Change Date Change the date of a folder and move the picture in it into the folder of the changed date HDD BD RE T RAM Press lt gt to select the item then A V to change Pictures by Date only Press OK e You can also change the date of a picture e Date folder of the original is maintained even if all original pictur
23. KE BBC HD Preview Red Cap Red Cap Red Cap News Show Blue Wave Great A 100 Sheep Dream inthe nrm UFO Hot Wave Cece Behind me Black House T Love USA News Show Te 100 Sheep Dream uso STILE Sa Heartbeat Crowntown Sale hat Garem bd Gaii O to display the list of channel genre Channel Genre All Channels Entertainment News amp Sport Movies Lifestyle Music Children Special Interest Radio Shopping A Y to select the desired item N 44 es RQT9430 OL A list appears with all programmes of the selected item When you select the landscape view the programmes that belong to the selected channel genre are highlighted WED 19 08 2009 23 32 fren TV Guide Landscape e g channel MED Ar channel 3 30 0 00 The Wedding Planner 0 Genre Time _ 23 30 0 00 10 30 Gack z E Tre Wecing ting beter Lifestyle ET Love Real Weddin The Wedding For Better or z 406 info TV PokerHeaven PokerHeaven com Europea Red Cap is selected FT eh Fre Police 1077 Police 10 7 Freddie Star ee Soldier 451 Audi The Science The Science Your Auai T D Tne fafBenfPfr ow in ste p 3 of Landscape Select Channel fees GP StetFopanme Portrait Landscape view E Prog Type CE A Y 4 gt to select the desired programme To view the
24. Receives freesat free digital satellite broadcasts in the UK This Blu ray Disc Recorder has two freesat tuners built in freesat is a brand new free digital TV service which broadcasts via satellite so you can receive TV radio interactive TV To enjoy HD programme You can enjoy the original HD progarmme by connecting to TV through HDMI e Connection gt 10 e Watching Television gt 24 e Also in HD gt 29 e Guide Link Series recording Split programme gt 28 e 7days EPG Timer recording is made easier because the TV Guide allows you to see programme information up to 7 days ahead gt 43 High Quality Picture Record with High Definition It is possible to record in high definition quality when the broadcast is high definition gt 19 If the programme is broadcast with HD this unit let you inform also in HD event on barner EPG HD Picture Quality recording mode gt 19 Compress the recorded programme gt 34 Copy to Blu ray Disc It can record in high definition quality in addition to large volume recording gt 18 Parental Guidance You can restrict viewing and playback of the titles that may include contents for adults When you record the programme with icon PIN is needed to playback the title gt 34 RQT9430 Convenient Functions VIERA CAST You can access a selection of Internet services from the Hom
25. To jump back 24 hours press the Red button programme gt 40 Series recording You can only jump back to the current date and past information cannot be viewed To jump ahead 24 hours press the Green button to jump ahead by one day To display channels sorted in prog type press the Yellow button To display channels sorted in channel genre press the Blue button 28 RQT9430 A Y to select Single Timer Rec then If Series Timer Rec can be selected on the Selection Screen refer to Series recording gt 40 e g Millions o View Single Timer Rec Series Timer Rec Delete 121 WEDIO08 13 10 1350 HDD DR gt 4 ProgName BBC Neve at One omm Cuide ung Genre N lew National and international news from the BBC followed by Wather 4000 FilmFour Mi vi WED 19 08 2009 13 00 15 10 Guide Link Guide Link gt 28 Series Series recording gt 40 is set Split The programme is split in two or more parts by other programmes This unit pauses recording during the gap between the parts of the programme This screen may not appear depending on the programme The selection screen appears if there are both SD and HD programmes when you select the programme go to gt below Recording the ITV HD etc programme O Confirm the programme start and en
26. 00 0R P Not viewed iv Page 01 01 ox Qorrion TT Select oReTURN VIDEO picture music HDD RAM When VIDEO is not selected press the Red button to select VIDEO A io select the title you want to watch then 4 Tips To view other pages Press l lt q gt gt To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons a Protected Not recorded due to recording protection Digital broadcasts etc x It cannot be played because data is damaged etc Currently recording Groups of titles EP only H Title that was recorded but has not yet been played EM only Titles that can be copied in HD quality once DD Titles that cannot be copied in HD quality anymore X Titles that cannot be copied Titles with guidance information gt 100 Parental Control or title with child lock gt 99 Child Lock Radio programme M NTSC Title recorded using a different encoding system PAL from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit e Alter the TV System setting on this unit to suit gt 104 Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance Grouped Titles All Titles EM 0 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed Press OPTION Press A V to select the item then press OK e g Grouped Titles or All Titles EEDI PICTURE MUSIC Grouped Titl
27. AVI or RI avi Number of Maximum number of folders recognizable 300 folders folders including the root folder Number of Maximum number of files recognizable 200 files files Support version Official DivX Certified product Plays all versions of DivX video including DivX 6 with standard playback of DivX media files Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile GMC Global Motion Compensation is not supported DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of DivX Inc and are used under license SD Standard Definition Video Playable EF IEF media Codec MPEG2 SD Video Entertainment Video Profile File format SD Video format conforming HD High Definition Video Playable BJ EF media Codec MPEG4 AVC H 264 File format AVCHD format conforming l r e Compatible formats ISO9660 level 1 or 2 except for extended formats and Joliet e This unit is compatible with multi session but reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions e Operation may take time to complete when there are many files tracks and or folders and some files tracks may not display or be playable e English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly Other characters may not be displayed correctly e The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is displayed on a computer e Depending on how you crea
28. Assign a different number from those of other devices for IP Address and the same number for others e lf a wrong number is entered then press DEL IP Address Please input IP Address and press OK The IP address will be cleared by pressing OK when there is no number input Press DEL button if a wrong number is entered 192 1 fo 9 Number O Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Notes e The numeric input range is between 0 and 255 Setting the DNS IP In most cases default settings can normally be used without making any changes When setting an assigned DNS server from your internet service provider perform the following settings After performing steps Q O gt left O Press A V to select DNS IP Auto assignment then press lt gt to select Off Q Press A V to select Primary DNS or Secondary DNS then press OK O Enter numbers with the numbered buttons then press OK e Follow the instructions given by your internet service provider and enter the numbers If the number is unknown then check the number of other devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN cable and assign the same number e f a wrong number is entered then press DEL Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Notes e The numeric input range is between 0 and 255 Setting the
29. CLASSE 3B EN CAS D OUVERTURE VITER UNE EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU FORSIGTIG SYNLIG 0G USYNLIG LASERSTRALING KLASSE 3B NAR L GET ER BENT UNDGA AT BLIVE UDSAT FOR STRALEN VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B NAKYVAA JA NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA VARO ALTISTUMISTA S TEELLE VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL R PPNAD UNDVIK EXPONERING FOR STRALEN VORSICHT SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ER HANSA RRAD RAKES BRIERE i HR CCEM lt CCTMRONTRL TEDUES Inside of product CLARO MED LITLE bhe n VOL1I70 e For your safety be sure not to connect or handle the equipment with wet hands RQT9430 Reference Index Adjust the Audio Quality Sound Menu 89 Adjust the Picture Quality Picture Menu 89 Album Music Edit ete eea a pant ete tate oa bheedd ha 80 Playera Bites hese and ahaa a E E E Ne esha on dang ew Oars 78 Album Still Picture CODY 2cceecyaes cee donee taba aE a where oe ee 74 Delet te crit sydd rE aus cia aes od Bane ads db AES EE 76 Edit sey ee ahaa a uses Ren stream E abet maces 72 PAY distr pe sare anette Sm Pale gem peceie etaeatea Ge nee a 70 ANGI cas seco acerareceiecsitaacane die aie eaten lieca evel eis aera 88 ASPOCU crcr arsersiidcaiin da cats anie aire ange ca nias ut n wa Sele Rane aap ee 92 Audio Playpack risien eE
30. Gy PG ese Music List E e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the HDD drive Ce Playing track 5 001 waren oon eon a 0002 Do this flower open eon 0003 Go to there from here Leon 0004 Goodby SAKURA Leon T 0005 Ifeastern wind has gone Leon While stopped ayok OPTION E Donevurn Slideshow Add to My p mi oA Playing different track Press A V to select the track then OK When MUSIC is not selected press the Tips Yellow button to select MUSIC p ET To return to the previous screen HDD Sees a Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen 2 Arists Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR Playback of track will stop Notes e You cannot play music tracks on HDD while copying e When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during paar QOPTION Please select to access music music playback the screen saver is displayed only when Screen Doren voro ete tees Saver in the Setup menu is set to On gt 104 To return to the revious screen press BACK RETURN 5 A Y to select the item then p C amp Artists o Albums 9 MyFavouritts Playlists o al Frequently Played 6 3S Random Play Caitegorise by artist Caitegorise by album Tracks registered in My Favourites Tracks registered
31. NAME then press OK User input RG12 8FP 2 Press A V lt gt to select the character then press OK 3 Repeat step 2 a Press BACK RETURN 5 to return to the Owner ID Data Entry screen Enter your HOUSE NO 4 Press A V to select HOUSE NO then press OK User input 2 Press A lt gt to select the character then press OK 3 Repeat step 2 4 Press BACK RETURN 5 to return to the Owner ID Data Entry screen Owner ID Data Entry POSTCODE Select O Y o RETURN BACK RETURN to confirm the Owner ID Data Entry screen RQT9430 Enter new PIN This PIN will be used for controlling e BD Video playback e DVD Video playback e Accessing to the channels you selected in Child Lock gt 99 e Playback programmes for adults e Using VIERA CAST Make a note of PIN in case you forget it The default PIN is 0000 O Press A V to select the number then press gt You can also use the numbered buttons 2 Repeat step 4 for enter 4 digit PIN 3 Press OK to confirm PIN Entry ocon n OCh Power Save Function A V to select On or Off then 0 Power Save Off On Minimise standby power consumption without Quick Start function and AV2 loop through in standby Off With Quick Start function and AV2 loop through in standby Gem Set to On
32. Not enough space in the copy e Create space by deleting any unnecessary items 32 53 destination 95 101 e Delete one or more items registered on the copying list to ensure that the 61 75 Destination Capacity is not exceeded The disc is not recordable e The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted Insert an unfinalised disc This disc is not formatted properly You inserted an unformatted disc 95 Rental Expired e The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays You cannot play it DivX 52 O This operation cannot be performed now e Some operations are unsupported by the unit For example 7 During playback reverse slow motion or reverse frame by frame is not possible O This operation is prohibited by this disc e Depending on the disc you may not be able to perform search or skip when film previews and warning screens are being played back When removing a recorded disc GS G0 Bl Es The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc for play on other equipment _ me Finalise the disc to enable playing on other DVD players Note Recording or Editing is not possible after finalising This may take up to Omin Finalise the disc Press the REC button to start finalise a Press the OPEN CLOSE button to exit This disc cannot be played on other players without finalising E To finalise the disc Press REC e You c
33. Now gt ncrypted AD ubtitles TX During scrambled broadcasting You cannot watch the broadcast Audio Description service may be available Subtitle can be displayed Digital TEXT is possible Programme is broadcast in multi channel sound Personal guidance information exists PIN is needed to playback the title when you record the programme with mark You can check the information by pressing STATUS AD Subtitles e g TXT Multi FS 103 ITV Wales Audio indications 19 30 20 00 are displayed as o available on so particular ie E TEJ AI freesat Channels _ Now gt Exit info i programmes but may not be available for all individual programmes being broadcast Display the extra information to confirm availability of these functions Ye RQT9430 Tips To switch information of the current programme and the next programme Press lt gt e Now current programme e Next next programme To select the information of another channel Press A e Press OK to watch the selected channel To change the length of time digital satellite channel information is displayed for gt 104 On Screen Messages Notes e Every time you change the channel digital satellite channel information appears automatically They disappear again after a short time e If you record a digital satellite radio broadcast or a digital satellite broadcast that
34. To stop playing Press W To show other pages Press d lt gt gt To exit the screen Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR If the menu screen gt left is not displayed display it by performing the following operation l r USB 1 Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A V to select Playback then press OK USB 1 Press A V to select Others then press OK 2 Press A V to select USB device then press OK Notes e Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from showing pictures in the adequate aspect You may be able to adjust the aspect through the TV e Successive play is not possible e Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive or the BD drive Using the tree screen to find a folder While the file list is displayed Press OPTION 2 Press A V to select Select Folder mO Select Folder F Selected folder no Total folder no including DivX title You cannot select folders that contain no compatible files Page 0107 x O 3 a D gt x oa 3 Press A V to select a folder then press OK The file list for the folder appears Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 3 Operation during play gt 45 to 47 Advanced Playback RQT9430 Playing DivX Regarding DivX VOD content ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be register
35. Using the Units Remote Control to Operate the TV You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn the television on off change the television input mode select the television channel and change the television volume TV operation buttons 1 Point the remote control at the TV 2 While pressing and holding TV enter the code from the table below using the numbered buttons e g 01 press 0 gt 1 Test the TV functions of the remote control for operability If the functions do not work repeat steps using different codes if available Some TVs may not be compatible with the unit s remote control Remote Control Codes for the TV Manufacturer Code No DAEWOO 64 65 DESMET 05 DUAL 05 ELEMIS 05 FERGUSON 10 34 FINLUX 61 FISHER 21 FUJITSU 53 FUNAI 63 67 GOLDSTAR 05 50 51 GOODMANS 05 GRADIENTE 36 GRUNDIG 09 HIKONA 52 HITACHI 05 22 23 40 41 INNO HIT 05 IRRADIO 30 ITT 25 JINGXING 49 JVC 17 30 39 70 KDS 52 KOLIN 45 KONKA 62 LG 05 50 51 LOEWE 07 46 MAG 52 METZ 05 28 MITSUBISHI 05 19 20 47 MIVAR 24 NEC 36 NOBLEX 33 NOKIA 25 26 27 60 61 NORDMENDE 10 OLEVIA 45 ONWA 30 39 70 ORION 05 PEONY 49 69 PHILCO 41 48 64 PHILIPS 05 06 46 PHONOLA
36. Yes then press OK DIRECT NAVIGATOR Group SHDD Time Remait The lock symbol appears when the title is protected Partial Delete HDD RAM Use to remove unwanted parts of titles such as commercials Important Once deleted the parts cannot be recovered Perform steps of Accessing the Title View gt 53 O Press A V to select Partial Delete then press OK DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete 25 05 01 06 A m 01 06 AN Enter Title Name HDD Time Remaining 20 08 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC Set up Protection Start End Next Cancel Protection Partial Delete Continue Divide Title 0 43 21 P Please set the start Change Thumbnail pauna DR File Conversion Prim P1288 RETURN to end Partial Delete function O Press gt PLAY and Il to set the start point of the section you want to erase Press A V to select Start then press OK 8 Press gt PLAY and Ill to set the end point of the section you want to erase O Press A V to select End then press OK For quicker editing gt 55 Tips To delete multiple sections Press A W to select Next and repeat steps O Up to 20 sections can be set 10 Press A V to select Continue then press OK D Press lt to select Dele
37. normal XP mode recordings e The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP a S a e S Functions RQT9430 Display and Connection Settings gt Setup N gt Others Ss gt 97 Accessing the Setup Menu All factory default settings are indicated with Underlined text A Y select Display gt Li Display On Screen Messages Unit s Display Screen Saver Teletext Blue LED RETURN On Screen Messages Choose the approximate time until the digital satellite channel information screen gt 90 disappears automatically The length of time the control panel gt 87 is displayed can also be changed but Off does not work Off The digital satellite channel information is not displayed 3 sec 5 sec 7 sec 10 sec Display Unit s Display Changes the brightness of the unit s display Regardless of the setting when Power Save gt 107 is On and this unit is turned off the unit s display is turned off Bright Dim Screen Saver This is to prevent burn in on the screen e When this is set to On the masked off area on the screen becomes black Only when connecting with an HDMI cable or a component video cable and HDMI Video Format gt 105 is set to any othe
38. screen may be displayed immediately after you turn on this unit if new overlapping occurred Refer to Check Change Delete Programmes or Resolve Overlapping gt 41 TV Guide system freesat What is the TV Guide system The TV Guide system gives you an overview of digital satellite television and radio programmes up to 7 days in advance For many of these programmes you can select additional information provided by the stations You can search the programme preview according to various topics such as sport films etc according to categories such as TV or radio You can easily find the desired programmes and set timer recording Landscape view TV Guide Landscape WED 19 08 2009 19 30 Broadcast date BBC HD Preview TIS TTV2 Red Cap Red Cap LoveUSA News Show 100 Sheep Dream Heartbeat ORed Cap News Show Blue Wave 100 Sheep Dream 17m4 UFO Hot Wave Used Car EE Behind me Crowntown Sethe or co Oro wu G Sete oganme Page Down amp RETURN atte Portaita mmz hour Prog Type mmm Charni Genre Series icon gt 40 NATZ 115 1TV3 116 TV3 1 Great A Inthe Selected programme Timer icon gt 29 39 Landscape view The TV Guide system offers detailed information as if you see a TV programme magazine This is convenient to check the status of timer recording Portrait view This is convenient to narrow down c
39. the card is being read from or written to Do not turn off the unit or remove the card Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card s contents e Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction Inserting the card Press on the centre of the card until it clicks into place If you are using a miniSD card ora microSD card insert it into the adaptor that comes with the card Insert and remove this adaptor from the unit e g miniSD Insert the card label up with the cut off corner on the right Removing the card Press on the centre of the card Pull it straight out Automatic drive select function e If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped the SD Card screen is displayed gt 68 69 70 74 e If you remove an SD card the HDD drive is automatically selected DIX Tale KO ce KOTTE Holding a disc or card Handle discs by the edges to avoid inadvertently scratching or getting oil from your fingers on the disc Do not touch the signal surface of discs the shiny side or the terminal surface the metal part of SD cards Cleaning discs or cards Discs are not indestructible and occasionally dirt or condensation may appear Clean by gently wiping with a soft dry lint free cloth in a straight line from the centre of the disc to the edge of the disc Return discs and SD cards to their cases when not in use this helps to protect against scratches and dirt Stori
40. 05 PIONEER 37 38 PROVIEW 52 PYE 05 RADIOLA 05 SABA 10 SALORA 26 SAMSUNG 32 42 43 65 68 SANSUI 05 SANYO 21 54 55 56 SCHNEIDER 05 29 30 SEG 05 69 75 76 77 78 SELECO 05 25 SHARP 18 SIEMENS 09 SINUDYNE 05 SONY 08 TCL 31 33 66 67 69 TELEFUNKEN NOVAES ae TEVION 52 TEX ONDA 52 THOMSON 10 15 44 TOSHIBA 16 57 WHITE 05 WESTINGHOUSE YAMAHA 18 41 Manufacturer Code No Panasonic 01 02 03 04 AIWA 85 AKAI 27 30 BEJING 33 BEKO 05 71 72 73 74 BENQ 58 59 BP 09 BRANDT 10 15 BUSH 05 CENTREX 66 CHANGHONG 69 CURTIS 05 RQT9430 Network Settings These settings are used when you will connect this unit to a network The connection to the Internet may take time or the internet may not be connected depending on the connection environment It is recommended that you use a broadband connection Testing the connection Always test the connection when a LAN cable is connected or when new IP Address DNS Settings have been made Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A V to select Others then press OK Press A V to select Setup then press OK O Press A V to select Network Settings then press OK O Press A V to select IP Address DNS Settings then press OK Connection Test IP Address Auto assignment IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DNS IP Auto assignment Primary
41. 1 3 Press A V to select Repeat Play Press lt gt to select On or Off Press A V lt gt to select Set then press OK e To playback the music Sample music in this unit or music stored on the HDD My Favourites or Playlist gt 78 can be played during the playback of the slideshow After performing steps 1 3 Select Soundtrack Press A V to select Soundtrack Please select music playlist for soundtrack Press lt gt to select On Snel Snak i Press A V lt gt to select Set then press OK My Favourites e To change the music to playback T After performing steps 1 3 te 3 Press A W to select Select Soundtrack then press OK re Press A W to select storage location of soundtrack then press OK Dy rere Press A W to select the music playlist then press OK Press A V lt gt to select Set then press OK Rotate While playing 1 Press OPTION 2 Press A V to select Rotate RIGHT or Rotate LEFT then press OK e Rotation information will not be stored in the following cases SS E LEJ Still pictures When disc or card is protected Ox com When played on other equipment When copying pictures When changing date e f you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed picture rotation information may not be properly stored Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVI
42. 1 When using this unit s tuner 2 When recording from external equipment E Maximum number of titles that can be recorded e You can record up to 499 titles on HDD When continuously recording for long durations titles are automatically divided every 8 hours e You can record up to 200 titles on one disc Eu Ed EG EG e You can record up to 99 titles on one disc e You can record up to 49 titles on one disc 35 Recording modes N 2 Recording RQT9430 Advanced Recording E FR Flexible Recording Mode You can set FR Flexible Recording mode when copying or recording from external equipment The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP 8 Hours that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with the best possible recording quality For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD RAM the picture quality is adjusted to between XP and SP e When recording to the HDD picture quality is automatically adjusted to fit a copied title on a 4 7 GB disc E Recording modes and approximate recording time Depending on the content being recorded the recording time may become shorter than indicated The time provided on this chart are an estimate Recording Mode HDD BD RE BD RE DL DVD RAM DVD R DVD R DL BD R BD R DL DVD RW R DL 25 GB 50 GB Single Double R 8 5 GB 500 GB 250 GB side
43. 3 Press A V to select PICTURE then press OK Recording Mode is automatically set to High Speed 4 Press lt d to confirm O Register still pictures for copy If you are going to copy a registered list without making any changes to it press W twice gt step Pictures from different dates or albums will not be registered to same list Copy Cancel an 4 COPY Direction g Create List gt Start Copying Create copy list RQT9430 Select the units to register 4 Press A V to select Create List then press gt 2 Press A V to select New Item then press OK ie 3 Press A V to select the item then press OK e g e g BJ By Picture Date Picture Register with By Picture Date Album Picture 1 Press A V to select New item then press OK 2 Press A V lt gt to select the still picture then press II A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary items Press If again to cancel Press lt d gt gt to show other pages The items will be copied in the order of the copying list If you want to specify the order repeat selecting one item at a time To select another folder gt right 3 Press OK To edit the copying list gt right 4 Press lt to confirm Register with
44. 4 Press A to select the item e Repeat Play All Repeatedly playback the selected album etc Track Repeatedly playback the selected track Off e Random On Randomly playback the selected album etc Off Re master This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher frequency signals not recorded on the track 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press A V to select Sound then press gt 3 Press A V to select Sound Effects then press gt 4 Press A V to select Re master1 or Re master2 e This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when Dolby D Dolby D Dolby TrueHD DTS DTS HD or MPEG is set to PCM However in this case audio is output as 2 ch from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal Display Still Sample pictures in this unit or pictures stored on Album View of the HDD can be played back as slideshow during Pictures playback of the music i While playing the music Slideshow Press the Red button Change the pictures to display Select Picture Album 1 Press o PTIO N Please select the album to start slideshow 2 Press A V to select Select Picture Album then press OK Sample Pictures j 3 Press A V to select the album then press OK arash While playing music a picture slideshow 7 can be displayed iim To end the
45. 54 DIVX c rridopradarrseer iene emcees 51 135 138 DR File Conversion 0eeeeeeee cence ee eeeee 55 DR Mode i322 scscccteecdewe Hiieewe ee awa wewee he s 36 Edit Chapters ic d ad ni eat earth aeear aging oats 56 Music 0n HDD ss cc cee dye denee beens caine ebay ows 80 Still PiCtUIe easa hreet ya ae bie oa ye ThA bee 72 MMS est eaten ar E nec E r aha atin ahieyasticice need E A 53 Finalise saosi aropa katre mia adna a Da 96 138 Format sesasis src d ward saraa e a 95 101 138 freesat Auto S UD prsi eroriari pripr odian ri eee wees 13 14 Chanpa siccevad a cect Gait ache Saga E a aed ais 24 TIMEFRECOING ssepe reiese eae A eka 28 29 TV GUIdG sect Oden deen hena un ee diver a ADA 43 44 FR Flexible Recording Mode 000eeeneeeee 36 FUNCTION MENU ccs idee ends eeu ce eepetiuee ohana nee 92 GIOSSALY 2scecte ce ene ade ened ane n EOE maar a 138 Gracenote Database 0 cece eee eee e renee 82 HDD FOMM ab seca ecw peta e nonr emerite RENE apaid 101 Handling Cane cocci peewee dt ered mesa ee Meads epee 6 Information for recording and play 0 20 HDMI 3 2 ccceriecieeierweasi ined eeansaeeseau ene 138 Gonnectinga TV 2 206 ss0ceewreerwndediave beds 10 11 Connection with a receiver 0 00 ee eee ee eee 114 Settings HDMI Connection 00 2 ee eee 105 HD Video CODY nace aeea ate cae cae se E AE a E erase RA 68 Play i fsccaianiae pideciewaee bea Ga eee ews s gaoled ales 4
46. Create List Copy restricted title can be Rac mm copied on toisc a A S AORETURN Start Copying Em Select te copy arecton onerum If you are not going to change each setting press W several times gt step Set the copy direction If you are not going to change the copying direction press V gt step Q Press A V to select Copy Direction then press gt 2 Press A V to select Source then press OK 3 Press A W to select the drive then press OK If you select HDD Destination is automatically set to BD DVD or vice versa gt step 4 Press A V to select Destination then press OK Press A W to select the drive then press OK The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected Press lt q to confirm O Set the recording mode If you are not going to change the recording mode press V twice gt step 4 Press A V to select Copy Mode then press P 2 Press A V to select Format then press OK 3 Press A W to select VIDEO then press OK Press A V to select Recording Mode then press OK Press A W to select the mode then press OK 6 Press lt to confirm O Register titles for copy If you are going to copy a registered list without making any changes to it press W twice gt step O 4 Press A V to select Create List then pre
47. DNS Secondary DNS Connection Speed Auto configure Connection Speed Setting O Press A V to select Connection Test then press OK Testing The test is in progress OK The connection is completed Failed Please check the connection and settings Notes e Perform the Connection Test also when any change was made to the IP Address DNS Settings e If the connection test fails it may be necessary to set the MAC address of this unit at the router side The MAC address can be displayed by selecting Network Settings and IP Address DNS Settings in steps O gt above Setting the IP address In most cases default settings can normally be used without making any changes Set the IP address only when the router has no DHCP server functions or when the router s DHCP server function is disabled After performing steps 6 gt above O Press A V to select IP Address Auto assignment then press lt gt to select Off Q Press A V to select IP Address Subnet Mask or Gateway Address then press OK O Enter numbers with the numbered buttons then press OK e After checking the specifications for your broadband router enter each number If the number is unknown then check the number of other devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN cable
48. Digital TEXT function does not work Tips To view another page of Digital TEXT MHEG Press A W to select another page then press OK e You can also use the numbered buttons to select another page Quickly access to certain topic areas and navigation Use colour buttons according to on screen instructions Showing Teletext Regarding Teletext Teletext may be displayed when viewing Other Sat channels gt 104 Teletext TEXT Q Si to show teletext eo A V the numbered buttons or the colour buttons to select the page Follow the instruction on the screen to select the page Tips To change the teletext mode gt 104 To show the sub page Only when there are sub pages Press lt gt To store frequently viewed page List mode only During the page is displayed 4 Press the colour button of the colour to store 2 Press and hold OK To change stored pages List mode only Q Press the colour button of the colour to change 2 Enter the new page number with the numbered buttons 3 Press and hold OK When Subtitles appears in digital satellite channel information STIL to show subtitles Press again to hide Notes e Programmes are recorded with subtitles when you record them with the subtitles on Tips To select subtitle language gt 99 Preferred Subtitles Signal Quality No Signal The digital satellite broadcast signal
49. E Setup precautions e Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan and the cooling vents on the side are covered up e Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to vibration or impact e Do not place on anything that generates much heat for example an audio amplifier e Do not place in an area often subject to temperature changes e Place in an area where condensation does not occur Condensation is a phenomenon DO NOT Spb Amplifier where moisture forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in temperature Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit e Conditions where condensation may occur When there is an extreme change in temperature moving from a very hot location to a very cold location or vice versa or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts the unit When the HDD warms during operation is subjected to cold air condensation may form on the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads etc When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room During the rainy season In the above situation without turning the unit on let the unit adjust to the room temperature and wait 2 3 hours until condensation is gone Cigarette smoke etc causes malfunction or breakdown The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray vapor etc gets inside the unit E While operating e Do not move t
50. ELE Titles in DR HG HX HE or HL mode may not playback on other Blu ray disc player gt 20 R The disc must be finalised gt 96 It is necessary to finalise DVD R etc on this unit after recording or copying titles to them You can then play them as a commercially sold DVD Video However the discs become play only and you can no longer record or copy You can record and copy again if you format DVD RW gt 95 Record to DVD R etc Play on other DVD equipment If the disc failed to play on other equipment we recommend you create top menu gt 96 Programmes with scenes unsuitable for children are broadcasted with Guidance Information which allows you block the playback of the recorded titles If Parental Control in the Setup menu is set to On the titles recorded from the programme broadcasted with Guidance Information in the night 21 00 05 30 are indicated in DIRECT NAVIGATOR DELETE Navigator and copy source selection screen with the icon You will have to enter the PIN gt 14 step Advanced Recording This explains about recording and copying Recording mode Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs DR HG HX HE HL XP SP LP EP FR Flexible Recording Mode Features Record with the same Record high definition Record in quality as in Record in quality as in quality of the broad
51. Guide freesat EPJ Various function with freesat This unit has a function that enables timer recordings to be controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster Guide Link Series recording gt 40 and Split Programme are available Guide Link If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide the recording s start and stop times can be controlled by the broadcaster e g delayed start e ls indicated by Guide Link in the Timer Recording screen in step gt 29 Series Timer Recording You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just one timer recording gt 40 Split Programme If a programme is separated into 2 or more parts by some other programmes e g news this unit pauses recording during the gap This is indicated by Split in the Timer Recording screen in step gt 29 When setting timer from the 1st split programme other parts of the programme will be automatically set and indicated by the timer icon on the TV Guide but not shown on the timer recording list If the signal is not sent correctly the recording may lack the beginning or the ending part of the programmes In order to make the timer recording work successfully we recommend you set the start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes up to a INPUT maximum of 10 minutes for Guide Link to function SELECT e g When you set the timer recording for a programme that will start
52. HDD and Disc Information 20000005 18 Regarding Blu ray D SC essiri eee cere eee eee eee eee 18 Recording and copying programmes 000 19 HDD and Disc Handling 00s eee eee eee 20 HDD and discs you can use for recording and play 20 Play ony GISCS e c 2 0 csc no ene eda gl ae dias abies aiinte 22 Discs that cannot be played 0 0 0 0 00 000000 22 Types of disc for the type of connected TV 22 USB Memory and Card Handling 23 USB memories you can use on this unit 23 Cards usable on this unit 2 2 0 0 0 e eee eee 23 Watching Television freesat Selecting a channel with TV Guide Watching Television of the Other Satellite Service Selecting a channel with the channel list Playback aE eae fare ME CEOLE d ele LEGEA HDD Timer Recording Using the TV Guide freesat EPpy Recording the ITV HD etc programme Copying Titles Deleting Titles DELETE Navigator Delete Titles During Playback I Title Important Notes for Recording 00e00 33 Advanced Recording 00eeee eee e ene neee 35 Recordingimodesie n oere re E chars sever ic neuen eicr eae 35 2 programmes simultaneous recording 36 Specifying the Recording Time 0 00000005 37 Direct TV RecordiNg aea sic sisi a dishinon ratia anatedodse ada E aoa E 37 Playing while you are recording 0
53. HDD or disc HDD of Panasonic s video camera etc gt EEE FAW All the recordings on the same date become a title From an SD card gt EJ mA Ga HA Jee gt All the recordings on the same date become a title HDD HDD DVD RAM DVD RAM Ol USB connection cable 1 Insert a card specified cable such as accessory of the USB equipment Play Video AVCHD Copy Video AVCHD a Copy Video MPEG2 Preparation Play Pictures JPEG i E T e Turn on both this unit and the Panasonic s video Se camera etc RETURN Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the card A Y to select Copy Video Connect the Panasonic s video camera etc to this unit Select the appropriate mode that da i makes the Panasonic s video A V to select Start Copying camera etc ready for data transfer then Q such as PC CONNECT on the XY Panasonic s video camera etc eSD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the copy list Refer to the camera s operating instructions for detail is x 0 lt gt to select Yes 7 then o SI XS Copy Video MPEG2 Play Pictures JPEG Copy Pictures JPEG Play Copy Music MP3 USB device is inserted OK RETURN Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the USB device A Y t
54. Internet connection Dial up Internet connections cannot be used Enjoying BD Live discs with You can enjoy more functions such as subtitles exclusive images and online games by connecting this Internet unit to the Internet gt 49 Automatically acquire the title Automatically acquire the title of the CD or the information about the artist gt 82 of the CD Update the software of this Automatically update the software of this unit gt 111 unit e Update of the software can be done from the broadcast too Internet This unit LAN 10 BASE T 100BASE TX Straight LAN cable p oO Ss Hub or broadband router A e When your communication equipment modem etc has no broadband router functions Connect a broadband Telecommunications router When your communication equipment modem etc equipment modem etc has broadband router functions but there are no vacant ports Connect a hub e Use a router that supports 10BASE T 100BASE TX e Make the necessary settings in Network Settings after connecting gt 109 Notes e Refer to the operating instructions for the connected device e It may not work properly depending on the equipment or environment used e Depending on the contract with the provider you may not be able to connect multiple numbers of term
55. MUSIC Still pictures operation gt 73 e g EEP Album View Useful functions during still picture Pictures by Date play gt 71 Start Slideshow Slideshow Settings Copy Album Delete Album VIDEO MUSIC Copy to Album Copy to New Album Copy to Disc Enter Album Name Set up Protection Cancel Protection al Still pictures operation gt 73 e g EAA Picture JPEG View I Useful functions during still picture Start Slideshow Properties Copy to Album B Change Date Pictures by Date Set up Protection k Cancel Protection play gt 71 Still pictures operation gt 73 e g EB Album View Useful functions during still picture play gt 71 Enter Album Name Set up Protection Delete Album Cancel Protection Start Slideshow Slideshow Settings Still pictures operation gt 73 e g EB Picture JPEG View Start Slideshow Useful functions during still picture play gt 71 Slideshow Settings Ex Set up Protection Cancel Protection Delete Pictures gt Album View Still pictures operation gt 73 Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR Still pictures operation After performing steps gt 72
56. Play Properties operations Edit gt right EEA Edit or playback the chapter gt 56 To edit the group of titles EE gt 46 Mee Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR PICTURE MUSIC appearance gt 45 L e Playing still pictures gt 70 e Playing music recorded on HDD gt 78 Refer to Title Notes e Restricted recording information remains even after editing e g dividing a title etc e You cannot edit during recording or copying etc Management information is recorded in unused sections when you edit discs The available space on these discs decreases each time you edit their contents We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 3 To exit the menu screens Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR To view other pages Press l lt q gt gt Multiple editing Only Delete Set up Protection Cancel Protection Select with A V then press H Repeat A check mark appears Press If again to cancel Title Operations Delete HDD BD RE EPA E a a r a DL Use to delete unneeded titles Important Once deleted contents cannot be recovered Perform steps of Accessing the Title View gt left O Press A V to select Delete then press OK Press lt q to select Delete then press OK to confirm Notes Epp EY Deleting an item i
57. Totala Press OK to display pictures Page 01 01 OPTION TT select aon O rerum voeo Pcre musie F sideshow Album View screen Press OK to display pictures Page 01 01 gao QOPTION Taat Orem E voeo Jricture musie F Sideshow Pictures by Date screen DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons Picture and Album protected P Date that has not yet been viewed Only still pictures copied with Copy All Pictures or Copy New Pictures To show other pages Press kd lt gt gt A V 4 gt to select the album or date then on gt DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture JPEG View SHDD Time Remaining 20 08 DR_ VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC AA a WIEN A o Page 001 001 GET OK_ CoPmion 1 select Pan e g EA T stideshow A V lt P to select the still picture then Press lt gt to display the previous or next still picture Useful functions during still picture play gt 71 Tips To return to previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR RQT9430 Useful functions during still picture play Start You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval B After performi
58. Tuning Dish Setup RQT9430 Auto Setup You can start the auto setup of the other satellite services gt 16 Tuning in Other Satellite Services Other Satellite Auto Setup Satellite Selection Satellite Selection BiAstra2 Eurobird _ s Search Mode Channel Type Manual Tuning You can set the channel of the other satellite manually Other Satellite Manual Tuning Transpounder Frequency LIZE Polarisati Symbol Rate Ksym s o FF 9 Press A V to select Transpounder Frequency Press the numbered buttons to enter the transpounder frequency Press A W to select Polarisation Press lt gt to select Horizontal or Vertical Press A W to select Symbol Rate Ksym s Press lt gt to select the desired symbol rate then press OK The scan starts Ph oar Ww Dish Setup You can set the dish setup manually Dish Setup LNB High Band Frequency MHz 22KHz Command jon 1 Press A V to select LNB Low Band Frequency MHz 2 Press the numbered buttons to enter the LNB Low Band frequency 3 Press A V to select LNB High Band Frequency MHz 4 Press the numbered buttons to enter LNB High Band frequency 5 Press A V to select 22KHz Command 6 Press lt gt to select On or Off e Press the Red button to reset all settings Signal Condition You can check the quality a
59. When using a PC in a LAN to access a PC or device that is not included in the LAN the IP address is called the local IP address e g 192 168 0 10 JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group This is a system used for compressing decoding colour still pictures If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras etc the data will be compressed to 1 10 1 100 of its original size The benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of compression LAN Local Area Network A group of linked devices in a company school or home Indicates the boundaries of a particular network Local storage This storage area is used as a destination for sub contents for playing virtual packages on BD Video LPCM Linear PCM These are uncompressed digital signals similar to those found on CDs MPEG2 Moving Picture Experts Group A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based digital broadcasting MPEG 4AVC H 264 A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video MPEG 4AVC H 264 is an encoding method used for recording of the high definition videos MP3 MPEG Audio Layer 3 An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of audio quality Pan amp Scan Letterbox In general BD Video and DVD Video are produced with the intention
60. after images when Set HD optimizer in the Picture menu to Off 89 playing video When playing DVD Video using e If outputting from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal set HDMI Video 105 progressive output one part of the Mode to Off and Component Resolution to 576i 480i in the Setup menu picture momentarily appears to be If outputting from the HDMI terminal HDMI Video Format to 576i 480i This doubled up problem is caused by the editing method or material used on DVD Video but should be corrected if you use interlaced output There is no apparent change e The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video in picture quality when making adjustments in the Picture menu using the on screen display The picture is distorted during play e You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or or video will not play correctly unfavourable weather conditions e The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in the following situations between titles recorded with different recording modes between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios between scenes recorded with different resolutions between playlist chapters e Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly 10 11 112 113 114 e Try connecting an alternative cable 12 vA 6 RQT9430 General Issues Sound
61. connected to e Confirm that the clock on the unit s display is set to the correct time Timer Recording Remain HDD 30 30 DR WED 19 08 2009 21 30 Channel N Schedule Drive Mode Space New Timer Programme 4 PROGICHECK ee ae e a DEL Delete Info Pagoup A Resolve overlap Page Down C OK Total 0 32 ee A Y to select New Timer Programme then e If New Timer Programme is already selected press OK lt gt to move through the items and A W to set the items 1 wees Ee gt 4 Prog Name BBC News at One BBS 1 CI The Channel number You can press the Red button to change Category AV You can perform this operation when you select a box of Channel e g All Channels Radio Registered Favourites AV1 AV2 etc gt 97 freesat Favourites Edit You can set date or weekly programme gt right Tips Channel Day Date Start start time Stop end time Hold A or V to change in 15 minute increments or decrements HDD You cannot change the drive DR mode You cannot change the recording mode gt 35 e You can change it only when you select AV1 AV2 AV3 or AV4 in Channel Auto Renewal Recording gt 41 ON OFF e You can change its setting only when you select weekly programme in Day Date Input Name You can enter programme nam
62. connection speed When the connection test results in Failed after the IP and DNS IP addresses are assigned perform the following settings After performing steps Q 6 gt left O Press A V to select Connection Speed Auto configure then press lt gt to select Off Q Press A V to select Connection Speed Setting then press lt gt to select a connection speed e Select a connection speed in accordance with the environment of the network connected e When the settings are changed the network connection may be disabled depending on the device oo S a 9 s 109 RQT9430 Functions Network Settings Setting the proxy server In most cases default settings can normally be used without making any changes Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet provider e Set the proxy server only after the connection test is completed properly Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A V to select Others then press OK 3 Press A V to select Setup then press OK O Press A V to select Network Settings then press OK O Press A V to select Proxy Server Settings then press OK Proxy Server Settings Initialize Press A V to select Connection Test then press OK Proxy Server Settings Testing The test is in progress Pass The connection is completed Press BACK RET
63. dark scenes This does not affect the titles in DR mode HD optimizer It will compensate the mosaic noise in the video and haze around the characters precisely Progressive Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit the type of material being played When the tray is opened the setting will return to Auto Auto Automatically detects the film and video content and appropriately converts it Video Select when using Auto and the content is distorted Film Select this if the edges of the film content appear jagged or rough when Auto is selected However if the video content is distorted as shown in the illustration to the above then select Auto It will work when playing with the following settings HDMI Video Mode is set to Off gt 105 AV1 Output is set to Video with component gt 105 or S Video with component gt 105 Component Resolution is set to 576p 480p gt 105 Sound Menu Sound Effects DA ma EP EPS G00 Bl Beye aA BG R A oA RW VR AVCHD e Re master1 e Re master2 Discs record at 48 kHz or less This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher frequency signals not recorded on the track e This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when Dolby D Dolby D Dolby TrueHD DTS DTS HD o
64. disc DVD recorders and DVD RAM compatible DVD players Note Take the disc out from the cartridge to use the DVD RAM with a cartridge TYPE1 cannot be used Disc type R R DL Standard symbol before finalisation before finalisation RW after finalisation after finalisation Data that can be recorded and played Video Quality in which video is recorded Standard definition SD quality Recording mode in which video is XP SP LP EP FR recorded Rewritable 9 Timer recording Copying HD Copy Once titles 33 O Copy in standard definition quality XP SP LP EP FR mode is possible Copying HD No Copy titles gt 33 O Copy in standard definition quality XP SP LP EP FR mode is possible Play on other players e Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment can be played back only ERTI can be played back only on equipment compatible with on equipment compatible with this disc this disc e f the disc failed to play on other equipment we recommend you create top menu gt 96 Note FY BG These discs recorded with this unit or with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible However discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played e 8X Speed RW disc is not supported Notes e Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be used for recording on this unit e This unit cannot record NT
65. e Check the HDMI cable connection Check that HDMI is displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit is set to On e Make sure that VIERA Link is set to On 105 e Check the VIERA Link settings on the connected device e Some functions may not work if depending on the version of HDAVI Control of the connected equipment This unit supports HDAVI Control 4 functions e If the connection for the equipment connected with an HDMI cable was changed or if there was a power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket VIERA Link may not work In this case perform the following operations 1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on turn the TV VIERA on again 2 Change the TV VIERA settings for the VIERA Link function to off and then set to on again For more information see the VIERA operating instructions 3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit and after this unit s screen is displayed check that VIERA Link is working The control panel does not appear e The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with HDAVI Control 2 or later function 86 The operation on this unit music e The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the playback etc is interrupted TV remote control that do not work for VIERA Link functions 125 Reference RQT9430 Tro
66. ee eden dy walk oe 115 SWINGS 2 vnc seg der need drengi ne E Peed oy wae ele 109 Other Satellite Service PAULO SOUP sre ts ae popei aa pines apd te E AR ENEE E REAN 16 17 Chanhelireismera nereti territa en aaan EEEE D 25 Owner ID iesieta niiit pintei E E ER E E 13 Parental Guidance Child Okie epa eae prawheteted a ne he ees anes 99 Parental COntrOl eeaeee die bane dark paa 100 Partial Delete nnanununsnnnnensnnnnennnnennnn 54 Pause Live TV cc cuccisiinciissdicicidrstitiiridtrai 93 MIERA sercdreetensoridute ka niiti eies als 87 Playing back HDONVIAEO aian aa ge E E A a DE AA nts raO 48 MUSIC ae a daa a nue de eles a E E E E 78 Stll PiCtUrEs ivi cera eating ane ected ein a Ye emt 70 Title ace eid cede ho uipa genei dane ara Sealers ae Greed a 26 Playlist MUSIC ey ccdb cin Yee cQel earthen anne te de aan ied dads detect 81 TIS seadedced i aver baa a ahead ei dashens many E E 48 POP UP Men sondre eta eae wees acne donate eask saan de nni 26 POWG6r Saves crocs jepin tEn perigee EERE REEE NDES 107 PrOQGIeSSIVG cscs cs cnscieneaesigeea dee cgars neue 89 139 Properties MUSIC is ask again Sen Ea ae E gan Seats E E ca ate Meme cee ane 79 Still piciul sce gi ese ote a ha eaa ea EE ne aemas ands 71 Tithe iss iscdoteieten attest we unera dee ere ele ad ane eee aetna batons 53 Protection Album still picture 2 2 3 4 2620004 Sececigaees need et 73 Card E ieee aes ah ees deere trace et 23 DISCS 2 ence satetaeee Dead endow
67. enough storage capacity Please make space available on the HDD e The original data DR mode with HD No Copy or HD Copy Once restriction will be deleted after converting them to HG HX HE or HL mode using DR File Conversion gt 34 The original data remains after conversion if there is no copy restriction e The size of the converted programme may increase for some combinations of programme and recording mode e If the power is switched on during the conversion the conversion will be cancelled and start from the beginning when the power is next switched off e The converted version of a programme including multiple video and audio content will contain only single video and audio content The Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast setting in the Setup menu gt 103 is applied e During Normal Speed Copy with Subtitles set to Automatic you cannot turn off the subtitle displayed on the television e When converting to XP mode select the audio to record with Audio Mode for XP Recording before converting the recording mode gt 103 e Select the audio to record when converting to HG HX HE or HL modes gt 103 Audio Channels for HG HX HE HL Recording e In titles with the Auto Renewal Recording function gt 41 set a programme may be unintentionally converted while in During standby So it is recommended to convert the recording mode by selecting Now
68. function read the manual of the connected equipment e g TV too 86 RQT9430 Playing music continuously even after turning RONNE ORUCA ENO VIERA Link i gt 79 Playing music continuously even after turning off power to the television x1 This button is available only when this unit is on x2 When this button is pressed the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents from where playback started In this case press lt q or lt lt to go back to where playback started 3 This function is available with the TV that supports HDAVI Control 4 x4 This function is available with the TV that supports HDAVI Control 3 or later x5 This function is available with the TV that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later Easy control only with VIERA remote control If you connect this unit to the TV that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later with an HDMI cable you can enjoy using more convenient functions You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV For details refer to the operating instructions of the TV Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control e The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote c
69. gt 24 25 64 65 Skip approx 1 minute forward cceeeeeeee gt 47 Exit the menu screen Show the TV Guide screen gt 24 28 43 Show FUNCTION MENU display ccceee gt 92 By using the FUNCTION MENU display you may access the main functions Playback Recording etc quickly and easily ae pe Return to previous screen ee Skip the specified time eceeeeeceeeeeeteeseeeeees gt 47 MD Create chapters sea stiraciscnudivmssctiadsancticeettesidinniides gt 56 Show timer recording list eceeeeeeeeeeee gt 39 Show menu for disc playback etc ccccceseeeeees gt 88 RQT9430 The Unit s Display oO as SD card slot indicator Remote control signal indicator Linked timer recordings with external equipment This flashes when it is operated by the remote control 0 MACAtO insanos aeaeaei t gt 64 Main display section ie USB port indicator Current time playback counter various messages s Copying indicator Playback indicator Disc indicator Timer recording indicator 04 gt 29 x This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted On S Drive HDD BD or SD indicator When a timer recording programme is registered S5 Select BD for any discs BD indicator will light up F
70. gt 84 Entering Text Copying music to HDD You can store the two formats of music data in this unit s HDD while stopped Music CD CD DA Insert a disc or USB memory When inserting music CDs this unit makes access to the internal Gracenote Database to obtain title information Music CD The album name track name and artist name are assigned The unit starts accessing the Gracenote automatically allowing you find the track easily when playing Database and searches for the title information back POWERED BY MP3 You can copy MP3 files from the DVD R DVD R DL CD or USB memory The track d artist ill be displayed on thi it e track name and artist name will be displayed on this uni gracenote if the information is contained in ID3 tag of the MP3 file About the Gracenote Database If search results indicate that multiple titles were found The Gracenote Database is a database used to search and Press A V to select the appropriate title then retrieve music CD title information press OK When a music CD is inserted the unit will automatically Ei AJ MP3 search for and obtain information about the inserted music The menu is automatically displayed sik Press A V to select Play Copy Music The Gracenote Database comes pre installed on this unit MP3 then press OK so titles and artist information can be obtained This uni
71. iha pa Goel ge ghee 69 SHUN PICTUS ee aise aaia ea ia eE O a EE E siya bunts 74 INGLES ae a TE e E E E AE I 30 31 57 63 Copy Title Playing scsciriopsesisirsiveserdscituesa 60 Create Chapter oiieisiccesdceiied ives ciarcsnn sie aie ected ores 47 56 Deep Colour 00 c cece ccc e eect eee cence 138 Delete AlbUM MUSIC sc tc cacrewe cies deo ree oa Gaede akan 6 83 Album still picture 2 2 eee ee 76 Alltitles di CS seerne cis ee teberia ta wiaee beaut 95 Alltitles HDD or 2 cc0e bei aranes gk eee a ees 101 CADISM sissid go a mark a eah Sects OT EEEREN 56 SUI PICTUS seraa dys ae aana E EE fe EE DE A 76 TS reprae rnad enea SE R EE EE E E 32 53 MACK side narecieeca ed wea atna ina PERDER RENE ENEI 83 Digital Audio Output 0 e eee eee eee 103 Direct Navigator MUSI eie kta oe data need aediee nee cds Pongo auc 78 Still Pictures 2 dace deni pakkoa chee d pe ae 70 WHS icacda set ea cgen ida gore aoe we hand waded a tay 45 Direct TV Recording 0 0 e cece cece en eneee 37 Discs Disenam osansa nase mi EE an pincer phar ana Eu RORA E NES 94 Discs that cannot be played 00000000 22 Discs you can use for recording and play 20 Format deb xsd enean e Dae ed de aaa Gee tena 95 Pay Ony GISCS is eitc 3 eer aya a e aac dip aio A aE 22 Protectio siescticneiend aly Yoana ver aide E EEE 94 RQT9430_ Divide Tithe i535 o12 c20ccacce ae semekice nae snennt wend
72. in Playlists Tracks played most within 200 tracks played recently up to 30 Tracks Random playback of all tracks When Artists is selected Press lt gt to select the initial of the artist Press A V to select the name of the artist then OK Press A W to select the album then press OK When Albums is selected Press lt d gt to select the initial of the album Press A V to select the album then press OK N 78 f RQT9430 Useful functions during music play EP Ei EDA ee E Operations during play Stop Press W Pause Press HI Press II again or gt PLAY to restart play Search Press lt lt or gt gt Press gt gt PLAY to restart play Skip During play or while paused press k lt or gt gt Skip to the track you want to play e Each press increases the number of skips Register a track to While Music List screen is displayed Press A V to select the track then press the Green button 6 m 5 my Favourites e Up to 99 tracks can be registered Properties While Music List screen is displayed 1 Press OPTION 2 Press A V to select Properties then press OK e To exit the Properties screen press OK Repeat Play 1 Press DISPLAY Random 2 Press A V to select Play then press gt 3 Press A V to select Repeat Play or Random then press gt
73. indicated with Underlined text Picture A V select Picture gt Ch CS Automatic o PAL60 Still Mode Seamless Play NTSC Video Output Still Mode Select the type of picture shown when you pause play gt 138 Frames and fields Automatic Field Frame Select if jittering occurs when Automatic is selected Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns clearly when Automatic is selected Seamless Play Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and partially deleted titles e It is not valid for titles in DR mode or AVCHD videos On The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly This does not work when there are several audio types included on the playlist and when using Quick View Play x1 3 Additionally the positioning of chapter segments may change slightly Off The points where chapters in playlists change are played accurately but the picture may freeze for a moment NTSC Video Output Select how the NTSC image is output NTSC Output as NTSC PAL60 Convert and output as PAL60 Select this when connected to the PAL format TV RQT9430 Sound A V select Soung gt OKs Oi Dynamic Range Compression Downmix Bilingual Audio Selection Digital Audio Output Audio Mode for XP Recording Stereo Audio Mode for DV Input Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast Audio Channels for HG HX HE HL Recordin
74. is not being received No Service No broadcasts are currently available If No Signal is displayed check the following e Check that the satellite dish is correctly positioned e Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly broadcasting Status Messages The following messages and displays appear to let you know what operations are being performed and the status of the unit During playback and or recording STATUS Keep pressing to cycle through available displays Current media Shows current recording or play status 951 i i Aa T Channel information Status of recording in background l Remaining recording time and recording mode e g 76 19 DR indicates 76 hours and 19 minutes in DR mode e Disc remaining time may slightly differ between different models 102 REC 2 The current date and time A 09 09 2009 Remain HDD 76 19 DR qats3 0 00 269 Elapsed play time and recording mode 1 T40 0 00 29 DR 2 T41 0 00 07 DR Pare ane Elapsed recording time and recording mode e When using Pause Live TV 23 31 33 09 09 2009 Current time The time when the picture currently displayed was broadcast y No Display Convenient Functions RQT9430 Convenient Functions FUNCTION MENU display By using the FUNCTION MENU display you may access the main functions quickly and easily 4 Functions displayed de
75. item then press DEL Deleting a track Press A V to select the item then press OK Press A V lt gt to select the item then press OK Press A V to select the track then press OK You can confirm the item that you have selected using the option menu gt 80 step 4 gt to select Delete then 2 The item is deleted Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen Press EXIT RQT9430 Music Entering Text You can give names to recorded titles etc Oo When viewing the Enter Title Name screen etc e g Entering a title name for a title on EG Name field shows the text you have entered Enter Title Name Top Menu Preview I Delete E Set zl llle Jsle EHe lele Je Ae esp Je OSESEVEES088 QO A V 4 gt to select a character then press E Repeat this step to enter other characters STOP gen when you ve finished entering text Tips Using the numbered buttons to enter characters e g entering the letter R 1 Press 7 to move to the 7th row 2 Press 7 twice to highlight R 3 Press OK To delete a character Press II on a character in the name field To cancel in t
76. not deleted e While displaying Music Menu screen from the HDD Press lt gt to select Clear then press OK Clear Frequently Played e While displaying Music Menu screen Remove e While displaying My Favourites or Frequently Played screen Remove all tracks in Frequently Played Tracks themselves are not deleted from the HDD Press lt gt to select Clear then press OK Selected track is removed Track itself is not deleted from the HDD Press lt gt to select Remove then press OK Press lt gt to select the initial of the album Press A V to select the album e To edit the track press OK and select the track with A V On A Y to select item then e g while selecting album gt 81 IOME Edit Album Name Delete Album Harum and track operation gt right e g while selecting arti ao re Delete All Tracks Palata All Tracke Edit Artist Name LF Album and track operation gt right e g while selecting trac x linaigta OC SCCS Delete gt 81 era gt 79 aera Album and track operation gt right Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 3 l To exit the screen gt _ Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR RQT9430 Register track to Playlist HDD You can register your favourite albums a
77. of the secondary video set BD Video Secondary Audio to On in the Setup menu gt 103 Notes e Discs may not always be played back according to the settings on this unit as certain playback formats are prioritized on certain discs e Only the primary video is played during search slow motion or frame by frame e When the secondary video is turned off the secondary audio is not be played Enjoying BD Live discs with Internet Many BD Live compatible discs require content to be downloaded onto an SD card gt 139 Local storage in order to access the available BD Live features e An SD card with 1 GB or more of free space SD Speed Class Rating 2 or higher needs to be inserted prior to inserting the BD Live compatible disc Some BD Live content available on the Blu ray discs may require an Internet account to be created in order to access the BD Live content Follow the screen display or instruction manual of the disc for information on acquiring an account Preparation e Connect to the network gt 115 e Set Network Settings in the Setup menu gt 110 insert an SD card gt 117 e If the SD card menu screen is displayed press DRIVE SELECT on the remote control select BD insert the disc gt 117 e For operation method refer to the instructions on the disc To use the above functions it is recommended that you format the card on this unit gt 95 x
78. of the service may not be available e Some content may be inappropriate for some viewers e Some content may only be available for specific countries and may be presented in specific languages e Depending on the usage conditions it may take a while to read all the data e The connection to the Internet may take time or the Internet may not be connected depending on the connection environment e The unit is connected to the Internet when VIERA CAST is used generating communication charges e If timer recording starts VIERA CAST will stop Convenient Functions RQT9430 Linked Operations with the TV VIERA Link HDAVI Control Q Link You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using VIERA Link or Q Link What is VIERA Link HDAVI Control VIERA Link HDAVI Control is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit and a Panasonic TV VIERA or receiver under HDAVI Control You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable See the operating instructions for connected equipment for operational details e VIERA Link HDAVI Control based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC Consumer Electronics Control is a unique function that we have developed and added As such its operation with other manufacturers equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed e This unit suppor
79. operate this unit This function is available with the TV that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later By using the TV remote control you can play discs using the Control Panel gt below e g Press OPTION Control Panel e You cannot use the OPTION menu while FUNCTION MENU the Top Menu for DVD Video is displayed Aspect and while DVD Video is copied RiayiMenu Top Menu Menu Select an item then press OK Drive Select c Control Panel Control Panel is displayed gt below FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU is displayed gt left Aspect Switch the screen mode gt 92 Play Menu Play menu is displayed gt 89 Top Menu a DVD V Top Menu is displayed gt 26 Menu APAY Menu is displayed gt 26 Pop up Menu Pop up Menu is displayed gt 26 Drive Select Select the HDD BD or SD drive Rotate RIGHT Rotate LEFT JPEG Rotate the still pictures gt 71 Zoom in Zoom out JPEG Enlarge or shrink the still picture gt 71 Play music continuously even after turning off power to the television gt 79 TV Power OFF Using the Control Panel Using the Control Panel you can operate search backward search forward stop etc with the TV remote control Select Control Panel then press OK in step of Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit gt above The Control Pan
80. programme gt 24 To record the programme gt 28 Tips To display the programme type Press the Yellow button in step To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected the channel genre or programme type Select All Channels of channel genre or All Types of the programme type in step O To Exit Press BACK RETURN 5 Notes e The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas This function does not work properly unless the information which distinguishes the channel genre and programme type sent from broadcast stations is correct e If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains all programme data are lost e The programme list is available if this unit has found a digital station and loaded the information in the memory This process can take a while depending on the particular station e The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the background when the unit is turned on That means that the programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it Advanced Playback Selecting Titles to Play You can easily select and play recorded programmes by using DIRECT NAVIGATOR mM EGE EES G00 BS Bee EG A Ae Pd EA While stopped DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles SHDD Time Remaining 45 54 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC 12 96 Bom And Bred AWraitul 2 1 35 1 e ee 46 b O g saa gt M_e owosjavi 1 13 1 Pacino
81. recorded 100 On Playback high definition video AVCHD Off Playback high definition quality title BD Live You can restrict Internet access when BD Live functions are used On No Limit Internet access is permitted for all BD Live contents On Limit Internet access is permitted only for BD Live contents which have content owner certificates Internet access is prohibited for all BD Live contents without a certificate Off Internet access is prohibited for all BD Live contents BD Video Ratings Set a ratings level to limit BD Video play Follow the on screen instructions Enter a 4 digit PIN with the numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown It will be the common PIN for DVD Video Ratings BD Video Ratings Child Lock Parental Control and Network Lock Setting ratings When no limit is selected No Limit All BD Video can be played 0 to 254 year s Prohibits play of BD Video with corresponding ratings recorded on them e Changing settings When 0 to 254 year s is selected Unlock Recorder Change Level Temporary Unlock RQT9430 DVD Video Ratings Set a ratings level to limit DVD Video play Follow the on screen instructions Enter a 4 digit PIN with the numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown It will be the common PIN for DVD Video Ratings BD Video Ratings Child Lock Parental Control and Network Loc
82. recording or editing the title may be lost or the HDD disc may become unusable We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost titles or discs You will have to format the disc EMA RAM FGI or use a new disc e If you use Auto Renewal Recording the old title will be deleted after the new title is recorded 41 The quality has dropped when the title in HDD is copied to the disc e Titles with the HD No Copy restriction can only be copied in SD quality e Titles in HD quality titles recorded in DR HG HX HE HL mode or titles in AVCHD will be copied as SD quality when copied to FY EA 33 Reference 129 RQT9430 Troubleshooting Guide aX rexe cellateMtcs je wm Recording Timer Recording Copying External input Continued Page Stripe shaped black noise is e An external playback device is interfering with the TV because the device is recorded too close to the TV Move the device away from the TV The programme name and the e There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title do not match recorded title still has the old programme name Cannot copy to a disc using the e High speed copying cannot be performed depending on the disc or title that is 59 high speed mode being copied Refer to When is high speed copy not possible for details When copying it takes a long time Use a disc that is compatible with h
83. service e Only MPEG 2 or AVCHD on a Panasonic s video camera etc will be recognised MPEG 2 or AVCHD copied to USB memory or an SD card will not be recognised e Picture data will be added to the titles recorded in DR mode from radio service when copying them in HG HX HE HL XP SP LP EP FR mode or converting them to these recording modes using DR File Conversion Therefore the data size will be larger after copying or DR File Conversion lf you are going to copy the titles to disc with least audio degradation It is recommended that you select LP mode If you are going to copy the titles to disc with least data size It is recommended that you select them to EP 8 hours mode e Title recorded from radio service cannot be copied in DR mode 59 RQT9430 60 Copying Titles Copy Title Playing Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc e It will start copying from the beginning of the title regardless of the playing position mA gt ERS EE G0 A EG ES Bd A Playback the title to copy When copying the title in DR mode with multiple audio and subtitles When copying at high speed audio and subtitles can be copied as is When copying at normal speed only the audio selected in Multi Audio AD in the Disc menu will be copied for the multiple audio gt 88 When copying at normal speed subtitle displayed during playback will be copied g
84. slideshow Press BACK RETURN 5 e t will also end when the music is stopped Playing music When the unit is connected to a Panasonic TV VIERA that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later and the unit is z turned in standby if the power to the television is turned in standby since Power off link gt 86 operates continuously The following operations make it possible to keep the power of the unit ON and to play music continuously even after turning while playing music 1 Press OPTION off power to the 2 Press A V to select TV Power Off then press OK television a ees e Sound may be discontinued for several seconds when the power to the television is turned in standby e f the operation mentioned above is executed while audio is output from the television the sound may not be output from the amplifier receiver It is recommended to set the amplifier receiver beforehand so that audio will be output from the amplifier receiver 79 JS Music RQT9430 Editing music playlist Album and track operation After performing step O gt left Preparation e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the HDD drive 0 While stopped When MUSIC is not selected press the Yellow button to select MUSIC When doing Delete All Tracks Clear My Favourites or Clear Frequently Played gt go to step DIRECT NAVIGATOR Music Menu S HDD Total Tracks 53 VIDEO PICTURE MUSI
85. the Gracenote Software enables this application to perform disc and or file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers or embedded databases collectively Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this application or device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own nam
86. the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 ampere and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 Check for the ASTA mark D or the BSI mark Y on the body of the fuse If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local dealer CAUTION IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMPERE SOCKET If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as stated below If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code Blue Neutral Brown Live As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured Black or Blue The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured Brown or Red WARNING DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE EARTH TERMINAL WH
87. the power in a time slot for which no timer recording is set If the power is switched on during the conversion the conversion will be cancelled and start from the beginning when the power is next switched off e If a title with the HD No Copy or HD Copy Once restriction was selected the confirmation screen appears to inform you that the original title will be deleted after conversion Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK e To cancel the conversion During standby After performing steps Press lt gt to select Yes and press OK e Conversion begins after the unit is put into standby when During standby is selected COPY on the unit s display remains lighted during conversion Only when Units Display in the Setup menu is set to Bright gt 104 When DR file will be DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles converted in standby is SHDD ios 45 64 DR VIDEO JPICTURE MUSIC displayed in the D 2 Bsc ruas 1238 Hin Aas DIRECT NAVIGATOR the conversion has not Tanem finished FP Not viewed lv Page 01 01 K OOPTION TT Select forerunn vieo EJPicTuRe E wusic Tips In order to save HDD capacity it is recommended that you delete the original titles in DR mode after converting if they remains after conversion gt 32 Deleting Titles Notes e To use DR File Conversion the HDD needs
88. there aren t e Shipping Condition was performed or the unit was in the delivery status The any stations in the station list Auto setup was then started and interrupted Do an Auto setup again and let it continue right through to the end The data is only saved after this has been completed The Signal Strength is over 100 gt 10 e Reduce the signal amplification at your satellite dish 98 Interference or frozen e Check Signal Condition If Signal Quality or Signal Strength are displayed in red 98 disappearing image the signal is weak e Check dish e Check your postcode area is able to receive the freesat channels at www freesat co uk e Weather conditions will affect signal reception heavy rain snow etc in particular in poor reception areas Even during good weather the high pressure can cause poor reception of some channels e Turn off the unit and disconnect the AC mains lead then turn on again Some freesat channels do not e This is due to broadcasts even if they have English sound In this case press 90 produce the sound in English by OPTION and set Multi Audio AD Please note that this setting cannot be default memorized if you disconnect the AC mains lead No picture output after changing the e After changing the HDCP on HDMI Output setting turn the power of this unit 105 HDCP on HDMI Output setting off once and turn it back on VIERA Link Page VIERA Link doesn t work
89. to reduce power consumption in standby mode The features of the power save function when the unit is in standby mode are as below Power Save On Off Power consumption Approx 0 4 W Approx 12 W Startup time Not quick Quick Turns off Front display The clock is not Stays lighted displayed Watching the picture from the external cannot do can do equipment connected to the AV2 terminal e Auto setup for your unit is complete You can now make your favourite channels and store them in the required order in the favourites gt 97 To check the signal condition gt 98 Signal Condition To tune in other satellite channels gt 16 Tuning in Other Satellite Services To hide unwanted channels gt 98 freesat Channel List To change PIN 107 Owner ID To correct the character Press the Red button to delete character one by one You can delete all input characters by pressing the Blue button You can perform this operation in step O or To display the Owner ID information on TV Press and hold lM on the main unit for more than 5 seconds The PIN is not displayed After 30 seconds this menu automatically disappears You cannot change the Owner ID on this screen You can perform this operation after step To set the clock manually Normally this unit obtains time and date information from TV channels to set its clock and automati
90. unit on DO NOT amplifiers or equipment that may become hot f The heat can damage the unit Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit Before moving the unit ensure the disc tray is empty Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the unit The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss Examples of causes of such losses are e A disc copied and edited with this unit is played in a Blu ray Disc Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company e A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit e A disc recorded and edited with a Blu ray Disc Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit RQT9430 Location of Parts Controls Remote Control Turn the unit on or off ssssssssesseneeeeeeeeenrnreneeeeneneee gt 13 Select drive HDD BD or SD osasse gt 26 70 Select channels and title numbers etc Enter numbers or characters The character buttons may be used when operating VIERA CAST contents To delete unwanted recorded titles timer programmes Still pictures OF MUSIC
91. 0 minutes A message appears when finalising is finished Press OK to complete 96 RQT9430 Notes e Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising This can render the disc unusable e When finalising a high speed recording compatible disc it may take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen approximately 4 times longer e After finalising El The disc becomes play only and you can no longer record or edit it EWM You can record and edit the disc after formatting although it becomes play only after finalising When copying in high speed chapters will be replicated The disc finalised on the unit may not be playable on other players depending on the condition of the recording There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters during playback E Titles are divided into about 5 minute EG 8 minute chapters if the titles were directly recorded to the disc the titles were copied using the normal speed mode excluding FLW X This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode of recording Tips After you have finished recording and try to eject the disc a screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears gt 121 Create Top Menu RW discs contain no Top Menu data Top Menu is a convenient function We recommend you create the menu before playing a RW disc on other equipment Perform preparation steps of Ac
92. 020 cece eee 37 Operation during Recording 0000 eee 38 Advanced Timer Recording Dpy 39 Manual timer recordingS 0 0 cece eee eee renee 39 Seres ECOMINGs s stage da Leas ge aoe See eed aes 40 To cancel a timer recording in progress 0 0 41 Auto Renewal Recording sasssasissrsarrrnruresan 41 If the Overlapped Timer Recording screen appears 41 Check Change Delete Programmes or Resolve Overlapping 41 To deactivate timer programme e g to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming 42 Notes on timer recording 0 0 cc cece cence ere e eee 42 RQT9430 TV Guide system freesat 2 200e eee 43 Usingithe TV Guide list arree e ee e serene 43 Selecting the programme from the desired channel genre or PKOGKAMIMBGrty OO cere aerate uaa crea suaiees erat 44 Playing Back Advanced Playback 0 0 c see e eee eee 45 Selecting Titles to Play 0 2 eee eee 45 Search cycle heehee bee a huw ewe Peale ant wee Re 46 SKID peas ees eee ene chee iaa OR aha end 46 Quick View Play X13 04d640 4 4 sea seeeta dened 46 Direct Play cece cya preriss ner certena pinpin Gated acne 46 Slow mMotion Play lt csacwianea ene ane ied r na EDE 46 Frame by Frame Viewing 0 0 0 cece ee eee ee eens 47 TME Slipi tos ks Oana ee Hoag k dees dvd dah E eed 47 Manual Skips isei ned whee Bo ew E yew NEN be ghee 47 Create Chapters esse
93. 080 resolution while of high quality will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true native 1080p full HD sources See dealer for details Notes The freesat channel uses Astra 2 at 28 2 East and Eurobird 1 at 28 5 East satellites To ensure your satellite dish is correctly installed please consult your freesat registered dealer If you connect 2 satellite dishes for different satellites e g DISH IN 1 Astra 28 2 DISH IN 2 Astra 19 2 the unit cannot receive the signal correctly You can use the unit as one tuner when connecting DISH IN 1 to a satellite dish that can receive SKY If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed gt 138 and output as 2 channels even if connecting with an HDMI cable some discs cannot be down mixed For display units compatible with HDCP High Band width Digital Content Protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input terminal PC monitors etc Depending on the unit picture may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI HDMI switching cable audio cannot be output If you connect a DVI device that is not compatible with HDCP set HDCP on HDMI Output in the Setup menu to Off gt 105 Tips You can check the satellite signal condition using Signal Condition in the Setup menu gt 98 When the unit is not to be used for a long time To save power unpl
94. 1080p you need to connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV and set HDMI Video Format in the Setup menu to 1080p gt 105 Notes e If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed gt 138 and output as 2 channels even if connecting with an HDMI cable some discs cannot be down mixed e For display units compatible with HDCP High Band width Digital Content Protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input terminal PC monitors etc Depending on the unit picture may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI HDMI switching cable audio cannot be output e If you connect a DVI device that is not compatible with HDCP set HDCP on HDMI Output in the Setup menu to Off gt 105 Network connection Following function will be available when this unit is connected to the network e This document is assuming that you already have a broadband connection e This connection is not necessary if following functions are not to be used e The unit is connected to the internet when the following functions are used which may generate communication charges depending on your internet provider You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home screen with VIERA CAST for example Enjoying VIERA CAST YouTube Picasa Web Albums Current as of February 2009 gt 85 e VIERA CAST requires a broadband
95. 289 English 6978 Interlingua 7365 Maori 7773 Scots Gaelic 7168 Tonga 8479 Assamese 6583 Esperanto 6979 Irish 7165 Marathi 7782 Serbian 8382 Turkish 8482 Aymara 6589 Estonian 6984 Italian 7384 Moldavian 7779 Serbo Croatian 8372 Turkmen 8475 Azerbaijani 6590 Faroese 7079 Japanese 7465 Mongolian 7778 Shona 8378 Twi 8487 Bashkir 6665 Fiji 7074 Javanese 7487 Nauru 7865 Sindhi 8368 Ukrainian 8575 Basque 6985 Finnish 7073 Kannada 7578 Nepali 7869 Singhalese 8373 Urdu 8582 Bengali Bangla 6678 French 7082 Kashmiri 7583 Norwegian 7879 Slovak 8375 Uzbek 8590 Bhutani 6890 Frisian 7089 Kazakh 7575 Oriya 7982 Slovenian 8376 Vietnamese 8673 Bihari 6672 Galician 7176 Kirghiz 7589 Pashto Pushto 8083 Somali 8379 Volap k 8679 Breton 6682 Georgian 7565 Korean 7579 Persian 7065 Spanish 6983 Welsh 6789 Bulgarian 6671 German 6869 Kurdish 7585 Polish 8076 Sundanese 8385 Wolof 8779 Burmese 7789 Greek 6976 Laotian 7679 Portuguese 8084 Swahili 8387 Xhosa 8872 Byelorussian 6669 Greenlandic 7576 Latin 7665 Punjabi 8065 Swedish 8386 Yiddish 7473 Cambodian 7577 Guarani 7178 Latvian Lettish 7686 Quechua 8185 Tagalog 8476 Yoruba 8979 Catalan 6765 Gujarati 7185 Lingala 7678 Tajik 8471 Zulu 9085 132 A RQT9430 vu 1 J H 1
96. 3 N a A Recording system BD RE SL DL Blu ray Disc Rewritable Format BD R SL DL Blu ray Disc Recordable Format DVD RAM DVD Video Recording format DVD R DVD Video format DVD R DL Dual Layer DVD Video format DVD RW DVD Video format R R DL Double Layer RW Recordable discs BD RE SL DL 1 2X SPEED Ver 2 1 BD R SL DL 1 2X SPEED Ver 1 1 1 4X SPEED Ver 1 2 1 6X SPEED Ver 1 3 1 2X SPEED LTH type Ver 1 2 1 6X SPEED LTH type Ver 1 3 DVD RAM 2X SPEED Ver 2 0 2 3X SPEED Ver 2 1 2 5X SPEED Ver 2 2 DVD R SL 1X SPEED Ver 2 0 1 4X SPEED Ver 2 0 1 8X SPEED Ver 2 0 1 16X SPEED Ver 2 1 DVD R DL 2 4X SPEED Ver 3 0 2 8X SPEED Ver 3 0 DVD RW 1X SPEED Ver 1 1 1 2X SPEED Ver 1 1 2 4X SPEED Ver 1 2 2 6X SPEED Ver 1 2 R SL 2 4X SPEED Ver 1 0 2 4 4X SPEED Ver 1 1 2 4 8X SPEED Ver 1 2 2 4 16X SPEED Ver 1 3 R DL 2 4X SPEED Ver 1 0 2 4 8X SPEED Ver 1 1 RW 2 4X SPEED Ver 1 1 2 4 4X SPEED Ver 1 2 Maximum writing speed of discs BD RE DL Up to 2X SPEED BD RE SL Up to 2X SPEED BD R DL Up to 6X SPEED BD R SL Up to 6X SPEED DVD RAM Up to 5X SPEED DVD R Up to 12X SPEED DVD R DL Up to 4X SPEED DVD RW Up to 4X SPEED R Up to 8X SPEED R DL Up to 4X SPEED RW Up to 4X SPEED Maximum supporting speed of drive for each discs Refer Recordable discs gt above Not
97. 4 844 3852 e For customers within the Republic of Ireland 01 289 8333 e Visit our website for product information www panasonic co uk e E mail customer care panasonic co uk Direct Sales at Panasonic UK e For customers 0844 844 3856 e Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre Monday Thursday 9 00 a m 5 30 p m Friday 9 30 a m 5 30 p m Excluding public holidays 1 AC mains lead K2CT3CA00004 e For use with this unit only Do not use it with other equipment Also do not use cords for other equipment with this unit e Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application at shop panasonic co uk e Most major credit and debit cards accepted e All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided directly by Panasonic UK Ltd e It couldn t be simpler e Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide range of finished products take a browse on our website for further details shop panasonic co uk Interested in purchasing an extended guarantee Please call 0870 240 6284 or visit our website www panasonic co uk quarantee Caution for AC Mains Lead For your safety please read the following text carefully This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience A 5 ampere fuse is fitted in this plug Should
98. 45 7 OK to go to step gt above Notes e You cannot display the TV Guide when you select Other Sat on step e The TV Guide list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done e The TV Guide system will not work if the clock is not set correctly e If NTSC has been selected for TV System gt 104 the TV Guide system cannot be used e If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other timer recordings the Overlapped Timer Recording screen appears to help you resolve the overlapping Follow the on screen instructions e TV Guide will disappear automatically when you do not operate this unit more than 5 minutes Tips To set the series timer recording with ITV HD programme etc Select Series Timer Rec in step 40 Series recording Basic Operations 29 RQT9430 Copying Titles CPD EPS ERS GEM EG o EG Bd a Preparation e Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is 6 connected to ENE ELNI If the disc is protected release protection gt 94 Q to turn the unit on OPEN CLOSE 2 to open the tray Button located on front of the unit Insert a disc gt 117 and press A OPEN CLOSE again to close the tray eg SKIP Copy Format Disc DVD RAM is inserted PAUSE ox H A Y to select Copy
99. 8 Initializes eee 107 JPEG cseveecnse see rei cea eee eee sees 135 138 Language MSM Soda i genres ecg cane a E Ga EE EE ess 100 SOUNGUACKS sises sine echoed eee Paws anh eee ee 88 100 SUDUNES realan absent he Res AEs bale e aE Sap 88 100 Linked Timer Recording 0c eee e ee enaee 64 POM ee sccinnntce ve acacie sa Oa es 103 139 Manual SKID 2 6 cccceciore grannies nriran aa game eee 47 Menu DIVX apaan e nemne AEA E ad aera uae BENRA 51 SED a den E E AT E E E EEN 97 Mode ROGOMING sissssirrsdretet pdt eiet inihea haie eee 35 SUIMMOdS epee votes ad ye eb ene eee daha haa a 102 MPEG sco scc cee ie cca do intipa Pe Suse eine E EEEE 139 CODY iaaea aee ace ae e E andrei dicden aeasconuaus anean TER 69 MP3 MGAU pete cide canna eein Gee eam peresi esa norai 77 Music COPY ta etunte diate ca adle ta Aad da E eee dees 82 Deletes ticdvedical jaan eed game E does 83 Edit aoa ne T noneek an iene cebesnhedonma des 80 Play CD escasos rdias si reta ops tniay betas ded 77 Play MPS oe ous tntteertaa teri bustwesehetaa dees 77 Play music on HDD 0000 ipuina emari 78 Name Album IMUSIC 5 e E aE ioraa AM doe iene EEEN E E aea aE Rees 80 Alb m StiNpiCtUre ects ace oneedaetias blew bana tihei 73 DISC peri tep eiaepinra sh teat nas ele we eG eR EN 94 Entering TOX cc ecccananteah tien s ane deat annie aPant litem dae doinite anare 84 MMS sits e departs anaE E E ane A Paneer E eee Ones 53 Network GONNGCHON vi a aeeu ds eae ence
100. BBC TWO Wales Guide Link Series Genre News Tommomow s TV The inal episode of Media Revolution a thee pat series Money Programme ks at he transformation of the UK TV indust S The series timer recording cannot be selected if the selection screen does not appear RQT9430 OCs You cannot change Channel Day Date Drive and Input Name With Start and Stop automatically set by the Guide Link function Start can be changed back by up to 10 minutes and Stop can be changed forward by up to 10 minutes This unit automatically records the programmes that are identified to be of the same series by the TV Guide data Titles recorded using series recording are bundled and displayed as a group in the Direct Navigator screen gt 45 except when using Auto Renewal Recording gt 41 20 30 24 00 21 30 SOS Red Cap S Holiday Programme Series recording icon Tips To check the schedule of the series Press the Blue button after performing steps Series Information WED 19 08 2009 23 28 Channel Schedule Contents 16 03MON 2 6 Comedy drama series about 23 00 0 00 housemates who are actually awere 17 03TUE 3 6 Comedy drama series about 23 00 0 00 _ housemates who are actually awere 18 03WED_ 3 6 Comedy drama series about 23 00 0 00 _ housemates who are actually awer
101. By Date Folder By Album Album 1 Press A V to select New item then press OK 2 Press A V lt gt to select the folder then press II A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary items Press II again to cancel Press lt d gt gt to show other pages The items will be copied in the order of the copying list If you want to specify the order repeat selecting one item at a time 3 Press OK To edit the copying list gt right 4 Press lt d to confirm O Press A V to select Start Copying then press OK Only when copied with By Picture Album from GDB to ERS GW EA or from ERS G0 to GED By When specifying another album as the copying destination select Album Q Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK to start copying New album Tips To return to the previous screen in steps to O Press BACK RETURN 5 To stop copying after step Press and hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds Notes e The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy list may not be the same at the copy destination e If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination folder the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still pictures Edit the copying list Select the item after step 3 gt left ETET Press OPTION aaa Delete
102. C amp Artists Albums My Favourites Playlists 23N Random Play nik Frequently Played ayok OPTION Please select to access music MP orem VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC press OK with A V A Y to select item then MWhen Artists is selected Press lt gt to select the initial of the artist Press A V to select the name of the artist then Press A V to select the album e To edit the track press OK and select the track HWhen Albums is selected Delete All Tracks e While displaying Music Menu screen Delete all tracks in the HDD Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Press lt gt to select Delete then press OK e Once deleted the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored Make certain before proceeding Delete All Tracks e While displaying Artists screen Delete Aloum e While displaying Albums screen Delete All tracks in the selected Artist or Album are deleted in case of Delete All Tracks or Delete Album Press lt gt to select Delete then press OK e Once deleted the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored Make certain before proceeding Edit Album Name gt 84 Entering Text Edit Track Name Edit Artist Name Clear My Remove all tracks in My Favourites Favourites Tracks themselves are
103. C1 108 BBC HD Recording programme not displayed on the TV screen To display the recording programme on the TV screen It is necessary to display the recording programme onto the TV screen to perform operations such as pause e f the input was switched Press INPUT SELECT e f the channel was switched Press A V CH To stop recording It is necessary to display the programme you want to stop on the TV screen gt above Press W e From the start to the end of the recording is called one title To pause recording It is necessary to display the programme you want to pause on the TV screen gt above Press HH e Press again to restart recording You can also press REC to restart Title is not split into separate titles e When recording is paused the record indicator flashes To switch the input Press INPUT SELECT To switch to other channels Press A V CH Perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording Record other programme with steps on page 27 REC1 and REC will light e Channel switch input switch while performing 2 programme simultaneous recording will switch between the 2 recording programmes RQT9430 Advanced Timer Recording GD Manual timer recordings This operation will only record from the tuner to HDD in DR mode Preparation e Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is
104. CK RETURN 4 Playing music CD While stopped Insert a music CD The unit starts accessing the Gracenote Database gt 82 and searches for the title information POWERED BY gt gracenote If search results indicate that multiple titles were found Press A V to select the appropriate title then OK Playback will automatically start DIRECT NAVIGATOR Music List 202__ 4 30 OCD March Moon Dothis flower open No Track Name Artist Playing track 01 March moon Leon a 02 Do this flower open Leon 03 Goto there from here Leon 04 Good by SAKURA Leoni 05 T eastern wind has gone Leon amp ok D Slideshc Retr Copy All P onetu E ow Retry access Copy AI Playing different track Press A V to select the track then OK Reacquire the CD title Press the Yellow button Music Tips To exit the screen Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR Playback of track will stop Notes When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during music playback the screen saver is displayed only when Screen Saver in the Setup menu is set to On gt 104 To return to the previous screen press BACK RETURN 5 77 f RQT9430 Playing music Playing music recorded on HDD A YV to select the track then Copying music to HDD gt 82 OK Preparation
105. DL gt R JPEG e DVD R and DVD R DL with music recorded in MP3 gt 77 RAF RDL e DVD R and DVD R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG gt 70 here e Recorded audio and music including CD R RW DIGITAL AUDIO You can copy tracks to this unit s HDD cD DivX MP3 e CD R and CD RW with video recorded in DivX gt 51 JPEG e CD R and CD RW with music recorded in MP3 gt 77 e CD R and CD RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG gt 70 Disc Following disc can be played with high e BD RE BD R DVD RAM DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW R R DL definition RW video e Finalise gt 138 the DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW R or R DL with AVCHD the same equipment that was used to record recorded by e Set Play Video AVCHD on BD RE BD R to On for the disc that Panasonic s has high definition video AVCHD recorded by Panasonic s video video camera etc and other video format such as those recorded on this camera etc unit gt 100 Close the session after recording Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording e Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD DA specifications copy control CDs etc cannot be guaranteed e The producer of the disc can control how discs are played So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating instructions Read the disc s instructions carefully Discs that cannot be played e BD RE Ver 1 0
106. Disc High capacity The Blu ray Disc BD RE and BD R has a lot more capacity compared with the DVD When you compare the Blu ray Disc single side dual layer 50 GB with the DVD R 4 7 GB DVD R 4 7 GB Blu ray Disc 50 GB single side dual layer About 1 movie per 1 DVD disc High quality You can copy the image of the digital broadcasting to Blu ray discs in the same quality as broadcasted Therefore high definition quality image can be copied as it is Blu ray Disc Broadcasted images can be copied as they are When copied in DR mode DVD R etc Broadcasted images cannot be copied as they are RQT9430 Recording and copying programmes This unit can record standard or high definition programmes from its built in satellite tuners onto HDD with the same quality picture and sound as they are broadcasted Contents that can be recorded or copied will depend on the copy management signals being sent by broadcasters gt below C DR mode e All subtitles and multi audio are recorded selectable during playback e All recordings are first made to HDD in DR mode only Copy as they are broadcasted BD RE BD R Goal SA DR mode J e All subtitles and multiple audio are copied e Copy as high definition HD quality the same quality as broadcast e Copy in High Speed mode cOPy When copying
107. FR mode 2 Titles that were recorded with Recording Format for DVD gt 101 set to VR format will be copied with normal speed In the following cases even if Recording Format for DVD is set to Video format copy will perform at normal speed e When the copying source was recorded in EP or FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode e When the copy destination disc does not have enough space e When the title aspect for the copying source and Aspect for Recording do not match e When the title aspect for the copying source is 16 9 E Ea copying source was recorded in EP or FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode To play DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R and R DL on other players it is necessary to finalise them after copy gt 96 To play RW on other players we recommend you Create Top Menu gt 96 but they may not play on all DVD players Copying using the copying list Copy DA ma m Ge ia gt EA DA gt El ECTS ES Bd A You can order titles as desired for copy to disc Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A V to select Copy then press OK EDIAN Soo Time Remaining 30 00 DR E Playas copy Recording Cancel Al le seve SC 4 Copy Direction Copy gt Destination ETJ TVGuide 2 Copy Mode VIDEO High Speed Information of the copy destination Others ovora 3
108. GATOR screen Zoom in While playing Zoom out 1 Press OPTION oom ou 2 Press A V to select Zoom in then press OK e Press A V to select Zoom out in step 2 then press OK to resume the display size of the still picture _ Zoom in e When zooming in the picture may be cut off O e The Zoom in information will not be stored fian e This function is only available for small sized still pictures Properties Information e g time and date is shown After performing steps gt 70 1 Press A V lt gt to select the album or date then press OK 2 Press A V lt gt to select the still picture 3 Press OPTION 4 Press A V to select Properties ihan press OK While playing e g 2 00 01 01 2009 Press STATUS twice E Remain HDD 30 30 DR Folder Picture No 103 0006 To exit the picture properties screen Date 01 01 2009 Press STATUS Shooting date RQT9430 Editing still pictures Editing still pictures JPEG HDD Ram sD e Editing can be done in units of pictures albums or dates e You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD R DVD R DL CD R CD RW and USB memory Preparation e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the drive Select BD for any discs Ebi GW Ep Release protection disc gt 94 card gt 23 4 With the unit stopped HDD RAM When PICTURE is not selected press the Green button to se
109. HDMIIN AV igh quality T fx a HDMI IN picture by adding HDMI OUT the HDMI cable a I connection gt 10 I DISH INPUT avv p A I i This unit ae l HDMIIN AV T E I l r AGV This unit HDMI AV 1m AV2 EXT To the aerial OUT f F e 1 LAV1 TV DISH IN2 POMIAN AV2 EXT To record from a digital satellite or cable receiver Refer to Recording from a Satellite or Cable Receiver gt 64 To record from a VCR Refer to Recording from an External Device gt 65 Your existing dish may require an upgrade to allow additional satellite outputs 21 pin Scart terminal The 21 pin Scart terminal transmits both input AV1 Scart terminal TV AV2 Scart terminal EXT and output signals for picture and sound 5 ae MAEHE Gy j rae neces i i i udio input udio input TVs equipped with the same type of terminal 3 Audio output CH1 L 3 Audio output CH1 L can be connected here 4 Audio ground 4 Audio ground This type of terminal is also called Peritel 5 Blue ground 5 Blue ground Euro Connector and Euro AV 6 Audio input CH1 L 6 Audio input CH1 L 7 Blue output 7 Blue input e When the unit is connected to a 8 Switching voltage output 8 Switching voltage input Q Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21 pin 9 Green ground 9 Green ground Scart cable you can use convenient functions 10 Q Link control signal 10 Reserved of Q Link 11 Green out
110. ICH IS MARKED WITH THE LETTER E BY THE EARTH SYMBOL OR COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN YELLOW THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF KEEP DRY Before use Remove the connector cover How to replace the fuse The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC mains plug figures A and B Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and follow the instructions below Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug 1 Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver Figure B Figure A 2 Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover Figure A Figure B Fuse Os 5 ampere 5 ampere RQT9430 Table of Contents i Getting started Features nanena Ghacesa ee trace sig ack ate Siace acetate 2 ACCESSOSICS 2c cit cei w cents eee see a wwe 3 Sales and Support Information 2 5 3 Caution for AC Mains Lead 00c cece e eee 3 HDD Hard disk drive Handling Care 6 Remote Control Information Unit Care 7 Remote Control Information 0 0 000 cece eee eee 7 Whit Can i c iisians dereiran ine Saba ae ated AE ave ahh oa ke 7 Quick Start Guide Location of Parts Controls Remote Control The Unit s Display Main Unit Rear Panel Basic Connection When your Television has an HDMI input terminal When your Television does not have an HDMI input terminal 12 Auto Set Up freesat Tuning in Other Satellite Services 16
111. J Release protection disc gt right card gt 23 e Insert a disc and card With the unit stopped 1 Press DRIVE SELECT to select the BD or SD drive e Select BD for any discs Press FUNCTION MENU 3 Press A V to select Others then press OK DPI GA NoNe DVD RAM Remaing 5 30 EP EDPIGA FUNCTION MENU Playback o DVD RAM Time Remaining 5 38 EP Eoo Playback CEAN Copy Recording WGuide i Dee Cn 2 Copy ai TV Guide Network J O Others OK Gu O Press A V to select Blu ray Disc Management DVD Management or Card Management then press OK Setting Protection BD RE RAM Use to prevent accidental erasure of disc Perform preparation steps of Accessing the Management Menus gt left Press A V to select Disc Protection then press OK O Press lt j to select Yes then press OK Naming Discs EPEA E G00 Bl a EST A ey A You can give a name for the disc Perform preparation steps of Accessing the Management Menus gt left O Press A V to select Disc Name then press OK Entering Text gt 84 Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 9 To exit the screen Press EXIT Tips e The disc name is displayed in the Blu ray Disc DVD Management window DVD Management Files 1 Titl
112. L N CO rv mums S Video cable Audio cable This unit AUDIO IN R L S VIDEO IN This unit Using Component Video Cables not included The COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals on this unit can be used for either interlace or progressive output gt 139 to provide a purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT terminal TV mE Component video cables Audio cable COMPONENT VIDEO IN AUDIO IN R L l This unit ET COMPONENT Pr re aid al R AUDIO L o Required settings CRT e Set HDMI Video Mode to Off gt 105 e Set AV1 Output to Video with component or S Video with component gt 105 e Set Component Resolution to the item compatible with connected equipment gt 105 SIDES OUT Use component output COMPONENT with progressive Off VIDEO IN Notes If you have a regular television CRT cathode ray tube Progressive output may cause some flickering even if it is progressive compatible Set HDMI Video Mode in the Setup menu to Off and Component Resolution in the Setup menu to 576i 480i if you are concerned about it gt 105 This is the same for multi system televisions using PAL mode Reference RQT9430 Additional Connections You can improve sound quality by connecting this unit to an amplifier or system component using the audio cable or the digital audio cable
113. MAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Reference g N 137 RQT9430 Glossary RQT9430 AVCHD AVCHD is a new format standard for high definition video cameras that can be used to record and play high resolution HD images BD J Some BD Video discs contain Java applications and these applications are called BD J You can enjoy various interactive features in addition to playing normal video Bitstream This is the digital form of multi channel audio data e g 5 1 channel before it is decoded into its various channels BONUS VIEW With the new play function of the BD Video you can enjoy the secondary video recorded on the disc in addition to the main movie Decoder A decoder restores the coded audio signals on discs to normal This is called decoding Deep Colour This unit incorporates HDMI V 1 3a with Deep Colour technology that can reproduce greater colour gradation 4096 steps when connected to a compatible TV You can enjoy exceptionally rich natural looking colours with smooth detailed gradation and minimal colour banding A lower colour gradation 256 steps without Deep Colour will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX Inc DivX media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that
114. MI AV1 TV mains socket Ga oe AV OUT This unit C HDMI cable not supplied mum 21 pin Scart cable not supplied 10 RQT9430 B When your television has a digital satellite tuner TV Connecting with a Panasonic TV VIERA If the 21 pin Scart cable is connected the Direct TV Recording and Pause Live TV function is available when you view other than satellite programme gt 37 Satellite HDMI IN AV DISH IN 1 To household l mains socket This unit gt HDMI cable not supplied m 2 pin Scart cable not supplied DISH IN 2 HDMI AV1 TV ACIN Quick Start Guide Kja Connect only after all other connections are complete After completing the connections proceed to the TV Tuning gt 13 e Refer to page 120 if U50 U50 1 or U50 2 appears on the unit s display HDMI features e Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo as shown on the cover e When outputting 1080p signal please use the HDMI cables 5 0 meters or less e Set HDMI Video Mode and HDMI Audio Output to On gt 105 The default setting is On e This unit incorporates HDMI V 1 3a with Deep Colour x v Colour High Bit rate Audio technology gt 138 139 e Video sources converted to 1920 x 1
115. Matas bes 69 Copy still picture eee 74 INSEE nanan ne a E a a nun snend ohne ese 117 Play Still PICtUIG wise repena o ieee neina a erede 70 Supported format nira teea rirni eee ee ee eaters RANEI 23 VIERA CAST cic cceeiaceones tidore toer idi nurk 85 VIERA Link HDAVI Control GOnnection 25 0 2cs a ceded ene dran ee 10 11 112 114 Operations i c ccu secbddenn page ati se bale eae te 86 SSHINGS istered bade e kaha ae bee eee 105 X V COlOUR ics eccee medrese Ennn EGEA E 139 2 Programmes Simultaneous Recording 36 RQT9430 Reference EU Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper Panasonic Corporation Web Site http panasonic net En er RQT9430 1B Pursuant to at the directive 2004 108 EC article 9 2 H0409FJ1059 Panasonic Testing Centre Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Winsbergring 15 22525 Hamburg Germany
116. O 3 a dD gt s oa Notes e While using this feature do not remove the SD card Doing so will cause playback to stop e A message may be displayed when SD card doesn t have enough storage capacity for BD Live content Please make space available on the current SD card or insert another SD card e The unit must be connected to the Internet and set up gt 109 to use the BD Live functions BD Live may need to be changed for certain discs gt 100 e When discs supporting BD Live are played back the player or disc IDs may be sent to the content provider via the Internet e The unit is connected to the Internet when BD Live functions are used generating communication charges e The playback may be paused depending on the communication environment Some functions may be disabled to prevent skipping to sections that have not been downloaded etc RQT9430 To enjoy High Bit rate Audio and Video Enjoying High Bit rate Audio with 7 1ch speaker This unit can decode high bit rate audio Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS HD High Resolution Audio and DTS HD Master Audio adopted in BD Video To enjoy 7 1ch surround sound the following conditions are necessary Part shown in the shaded area of table given below e Connect an amplifier receiver with 7 1ch speaker supporting HDMI High Bit rate Audio using a High Speed HDMI cable gt 101 e Set BD Video Secondary Audio to Off in the Setup men
117. Panasonic Operating Instructions Blu ray Disc Recorder Model No DMR BS850EB DMR BS750EB gt a b p N we 2 The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show the images of DMR BS850EB Dear customer Thank you for purchasing this product For optimum performance and safety please read these instructions carefully Before connecting operating or adjusting this product please read the instructions completely Please keep this manual for future reference Note EB on the packaging indicates the United Kingdom oy viera uF IW CHD u DP surges freesatr Lin e COMPACT RAM BONUSVIEW BDY i amp GLIVE gracenote VREO WE Ss amp ae ee Java D3 Trademark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting Project POWERED Declaration of Conformity 12th December 2008 Digital Video No 6261 Broadcasting No 6262 This Blu ray Disc Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only not Pay TV or encrypted channels This unit does not have a terrestrial tuner Region management information BD Video Example This unit plays BD Video marked with labels containing the region code B B DVD Video Example The unit plays DVD Video marked with labels containing the region number 2 or ALL E Web Site http www panasonic europe com LEB RQT9430 1B Features freesat HD tuners built in
118. Pep All Titles screen only This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback from many titles Press OPTION 2 Press A V to select Sort then press OK Press A V to select the item then press OK If you select an item other than No e The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback of the selected title has finished You cannot play titles continuously e Skip and Time Slip will function only with the title currently being played back e If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen or switch to another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen the sort will be cancelled RQT9430 Recording j x O is a D gt x oO RQT9430 Advanced Playback 46 To play grouped titles EDJ 14 Press A V to select the group then press OK 2 Press A V to select the title then press OK Play the titles continuously Grouped Playback While the Grouped Titles screen is displayed Press A V to select the group and press gt PLAY To edit the group of titles E EMY Grouped Titles screen only 1 Press A V to select a title or a group then press LIE A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary titles e Press If to cancel Press OPTION 3 Press A V to select the option then press OK Create Group Press lt gt to select Create then press OK Selected titles are bundled t
119. R in High Speed Copy s c0is edge cw aowaled aganida henad 58 Copy restrictions 0 0 ete ee 58 Copying list icons and functions 00000005 58 Frequently Asked Questions 000000 eee eeee 59 Copy Title Playgo peccc case taeda tee E oad 60 Copying using the copying list Copy 00 61 Copying a finalised DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R and RDL 0 0 0 c cee eee 63 With Other Equipment Recording from a Satellite or Cable Receiver 64 Manual Recording sssini aa eee eine a ee geo ATENE an 64 Linked timer recordings with external equipment SKY Digital STB satellite cable receiver EXT LINK 64 Recording from an External Device 65 Recording from a VCR 6l creer can oaa cinerea arrepiar 65 Recording from a DV Camcorder 20000000 eee 66 Recording via AV3 Input 2 0 eee eee 67 Flexible Recording via AV Input 00000 67 Copying HD Video AVCHD format 68 From an SD card Of DISCS errepi dea gucci ea deeb eed 68 Froma video equipment 26 6 ccc ee a anans eevee seas eee 68 Copying SD Video MPEG2 format 69 From an SD card 1 eect eee 69 From a video equipment 0 cece eee eee teisiti 69 I Still pictures Playing still pictures 0 0 0 cee eee 70 Useful functions during still picture play 0 71 Editing still pictures
120. RT Update of the software will start once the download is completed e UPDO O Software is updating e FINISH Updated of the software has completed x You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit Notes e If the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the start of the download the download will not be executed For broadcast Within 4 hours For Internet Within 1 hour e If downloading on this unit fails or this unit is not connected to the Internet then you can download the latest software from the following website and burn it to a CD R to update the software http panasonic net support 111 a S a e S RQT9430 Functions Additional Connections e Before connection turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions Adding a VCR Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder Adding a Digital Satellite or Cable Receiver Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite or Cable Receiver RF coaxial cable E 21 pin Scart cable E 21 pin Scart cable HDMI cable HDMI cable Digital satellite or cable receiver TV a ad
121. RW DVD Video format that has been recorded on other equipment Format the disc to use it However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted UNSUPPORT e You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record onto e You tried to operate with a non compatible USB memory UPD O e The software is being updated Q stands for a number You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete U50 e The terminal antenna cable or DISH is short circuited as for both DISH IN 1 and DISH 2 Check the connection status U50 1 The terminal antenna cable or DISH is short circuited as for DISH IN 1 Check the connection status U50 2 The terminal antenna cable or DISH is short circuited as for DISH IN 2 Check the connection status U59 e The unit is hot The unit switches to standby for safety reasons Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit U61 e When a disc is not inserted Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording or playback This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation it is not broken Once the display clears you can use the unit again U72 e The HDMI connection acts unusually U73 The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo as shown on the c
122. SC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings However both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD BD RE or BD R e You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording E Regarding 8 cm Disc This unit cannot record or edit the 8 cm BD RE BD R DVD RAM DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW R DL or RW Only playback or copy to the HDD is possible RQT9430 HDD and Disc Handling Play only discs Standard Logo Uses symbol High Definition HD movie and music discs e This unit can playback BONUSVIEW or BD Live compatible discs gt 49 BD Video ep BONDS MEW GLI VE VELAY EURE e When playing a set of two or more BD Video discs the menu screen may continue to display even if the disc has been ejected e To enjoy High Bit rate Audio and Video gt 50 e Operation of this unit may become slower when the BD J application gt 138 is executing This is not malfunction DVD Video DVD DVD V High quality movie and music discs gt lt a DVD V gh quality DVD RW DVD RW video recorded on another DVD recorder DVD Video DVD e a formatting gt 95 the disc you can copy onto it in DVD Video Recording d RWE ormat re 7 Row e It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for formet recording BVE DVD DVD Divx MP3 DVD R and DVD R DL with video recorded in DivX gt 51 DVD R
123. URN 5 to exit Fail Please check the connection and settings Q Press A V to select Proxy Address then press OK gt 84 Entering Text After the input of Proxy Address is completed 8 Press A V to select Proxy Port Number then press OK O Enter numbers with the numbered buttons then press OK Proxy Port Number Please input HTTP Proxy Server Port Nurr P DE input ree DEL button ifa wrong number o ao 10 Press lt to select Yes then press OK To set back to default setting After performing steps gt above Press A W to select Initialize then press OK Press lt d to select Yes then press OK RQT9430 Setting the network service VIERA CAST Press FUNCTION MENU Press A V to select Others then press OK Press A V to select Setup then press OK Press A V to select Network Settings then press OK Press A V to select Network Service then press OK Network Service orf On In e Network Lock gt 106 e Automatic Volume Control Select On the volume is controlled by this unit automatically If you want to enjoy the original volume set it to Off e Picture Zoom Select In to enlarge the picture or select Out to reduce the picture Software Update Software of this unit can be updated automatically by followin
124. USB 2 0 Full Speed High Speed e USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used e USB memories that support bulk only transfer CBI Control Bulk Interrupt is not supported e Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported e MTP Media Transport Protocol device is not supported e A multi port USB card reader is not supported FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported e UDF NTFS exFAT file system is not supported Compatible USB memories ASN EN e Depending on the sector size some files may not work e Only the first partition on USB memories with multi partition is supported Standard symbol USB Data that can be played DivX MP3 Still pictures JPEG MP3 e It can be copied to HDD Still pictures JPEG e Itcan be copied to HDD BD RE or DVD RAM Data that can be copied SD Video MPEG2 format HD Video AVCHD format e If a Panasonic s video camera etc with HDD is connected to this units USB port you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this unit s HDD or DVD RAM gt 69 you can copy the HD Video shot with the camera to this units HDD BD RE or BD R gt 68 e Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit Notes e This units USB port does not support bus powered USB device Cards usable on this unit SD cards can be used for playback copy to HDD or di
125. USB port Type A 1 pc SD Card Slot 1 pc LAN Ethernet Port 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Television system Tuner system Antenna receive frequency Input impedance Demodulation Satellite freesat Other Sat 950 MHz to 2150 MHz Nominal 75 Q QPSK 8PSK LNB input F shape terminal female power supply 13 V 18 V max 350 mA 22 kHz 0 6 Vp p LNB output Not provided RF converter output Not provided Others Region code DVD 2 BD Region B Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C Operating humidity range Power supply Power consumption 10 to 80 RH no condensation AC 220 to 240 V 50 Hz Approx 58 W Approx 57 W OEH 430 mm x 66 mm x 330 mm OESE 430 mm x 59 mm x 330 mm Approx 4 1 kg Dimensions WxHxD Mass Power consumption in standby mode Approx 0 4 W Power Save mode ON Approx 12 W Power Save mode OFF SD Card Slot Compatible media Format Data that can be played USB device USB standard Format SD Memory Card slot 1 pc SD Memory Card SDHC Memory Card FAT12 FAT16 In case of SD Memory Card FAT32 In case of SDHC Memory Card JPEG SD Standard Definition Video HD High Definition Video USB 2 0 High Speed FAT16 FAT32 Data that can be played MP3 Playable media File format MP3 JPEG DivX SD Standard Definition Video HD High Definition Video GED Ed ES ee Ed MP3 e Files must have the extension
126. V RI R DLI RW BD V DVD V RW VR Preparation Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is connected to amp Q to turn the unit on If you use a disc 2 OPEN CLOSE to open the tray Button located on front of the unit Insert a disc gt 117 and press A OPEN CLOSE again to close the tray DRIVE a few times to select the HDD or BD drive Select BD for any discs PLAY x1 3 gt Sy Stopping Play Press W The stopped position is memorized Resume play function This operation may not work depending on a disc or the position where it was stopped Menu screens on the TV DVD V Pausing Play Press H Press again to restart play Generally menu screens that appear on the TV may be navigated as follows e g DVDTOP MENU 7 Subtitles Chapter List A V lt P gt to select an item then You can sometimes use the numbered buttons to select an item 26 RQT9430 Tips To display Pop up Menu During play Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR To display Top Menu While playing 1 Press OPTION 2 Press A V to select Top Menu then press OK While stopped Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR 1 Press OPTION 2 Press A V to select Top Menu then press OK Notes Playback starts from the point specified by the disc e Depending on the disc t
127. V CH To see programme information programme name programme duration broadcast time description Programmes with the symbol Press STATUS TV Guide Portrait WED 190072009 13 00 e Press A and to scroll up and down To show other pages Press A CH Previous or V CH Next To return to the TV Guide list Press STATUS To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 3 To exit the screen Press EXIT Notes e The TV Guide system setup will not work if the clock is not set correctly or the wrong postcode is selected e Some digital broadcast may not send programme information e Set the timer recording manually gt 39 Manual timer recordings RQT9430 Recording TV Guide system freesat Selecting the programme from the desired channel genre or programme type This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by genre e g All Channels Radio or programme type e g Movies Sport Q a few times to select freesat then on XY ee Favourites Movies Lifestyle Music Children Special Interest Radio Shopping Gaming amp Dating Gorm A V lt P to select the desired genre then 2 The TV Guide list appears WED 19 08 2009 13 30 All Types L AI Channels TV Guide Landscape WED 19th 12 00 20 00 BBC HD Preview Time 14 00 EEJ 15 00 EJ
128. VD Titles recorded to the HDD from external input with Recording Format for DVD set to Video format can be copied to DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R R DL and RW using high speed mode We recommend turning the setting VR format if high speed copy to DVD R etc is not necessary when recording a programme This setting is effective when recording from external equipment including DV equipment or when copying from a finalised DVD Video disc Video format You can high speed copy to DVD R etc VR format High speed copy from HDD is possible only to DVD RAM e In some cases copying to DVD R etc using the high speed mode does not work BD DVD Speed for High Speed Copy Select the speed of high speed copying When using high speed copy compatible discs Maximum Normal Silent Selecting Normal Silent means the noise generated by this unit is less than Maximum however the time required for copying will double approximately HDD Management e Press and hold OK for 3 seconds to show the following settings Delete all titles Delete all titles in HDD e Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected Format HDD Format of the HDD is performed j 101 RQT9430 Convenient Functions Picture and Sound Settings gt Setup NS gt Others gt 97 Accessing the Setup Menu All factory default settings are
129. a freesal freesal Other Signal e e n saa 1 Press A W to select Child Lock then press OK 2 Press A W to enter PIN You can also use the numbered buttons It will be the common PIN for DVD Video Ratings BD Video Ratings Child Lock Parental Control and Network Lock 3 Press OK Child Lock List TV and AV 101 BBC 1 Wales 102 BBC TWO Wales 103 ITV1 Wales 104 S4C Digidol 4 Press A W to select the channel or AV input to prevent access to 5 Press OK e Press OK again to cancel e Press the Yellow button to lock all channel and AV input e Press the Blue button to unlock all channel and AV input e Press the Red button to change the channel type displayed AV gt freesat gt Other sat e Should you see a lock symbol to show the channel locked To unlock select the channel and press OK The lock symbol will disappear e To change the PIN see page 107 Preferred Multi Audio You can choose the audio language for digital broadcast If the selected language is not available then the original language will be selected 1 Press A V to select Preferred Multi Audio then press OK 2 Press A W to select Multi Audio 3 Press lt gt to select the language from the followings English Welsh Gaelic 4 Press A W to select Audio Description 5 Press
130. aa hoes atte wb deoawane nare ae Meenas 88 Audio Description ice oie cee ha vee te ee eee 90 Auto Renewal Recording 00eeeee eee eens 41 AVCHD COPY age eenaa e e santuttn ecm aust EE EE GTE 68 PNY 551 624 sscgunadicsyin a E eara E ENE Botte dus Rayan RN 48 BD DVD Speed for High Speed Copy o s 101 BD LIVG eis et nrn ennemini eaa cade RETE Eaa 49 BONUSVIEW i ccsceeeccageea keene e initan iakat 49 Change Thumbnail 0 000ccece cece nonnen 54 Channel SCUINGS i fed aicdhawe de tiae bee aia eee eee 97 Chapter cccccs ccd sn eeeie ne necne sede actin aye EEES 56 Chasing Playback 2 00 25 i0se8secsee ew cena weer nea 37 Cleaning DSO secs earn nnd gales iui e megs eae EE RE E ra E ects 117 eE E E E E A E ge E 7 MaINUNI weiss reid wantin r mace ee cline parva pi nae Teles 7 Clock Settings so 2c 2ecicck ceca etese terai uana nE 15 Connection Aaral yest asturi Sea Hs wee ed aan Aas eens 112 AMPIE eine te de eee ede ob ae wales Pe ek ee 114 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals 113 PALM Mh a r E eat een aes ate Goat 10 11 112 114 INGEWOUNIC s oraso Daa ce ENEE a PEE ENEO E 115 Satellite diS ennta ceded oe ewe no desma 10 12 112 S VIDEO OUT terminal sonni parta nning 113 MGIEVISION ss 5 lt 50 E epltorec ence ieee ape eed Soe 10 12 112 114 Copy HD VidCO xe 5 ntie teagan aan en dane ENAA 68 MUSIC eee otk eres een the di ace oa ea a ae ee Se 82 SD Vidago dedesi pa daekan
131. ack or pause Press CREATE CHAPTER Chapters are divided at the point pressed e DY o i Y Chapter has been created y ou Tips To delete the Chapter Mark 1 While paused Press k lt gt gt and skip to the location you want to delete 2 Press CREATE CHAPTER 3 Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Editing and playing chapters 1 Press DRIVE SELECT to select the drive Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR EA Eaa GAN When VIDEO is not selected press the Red button to select VIDEO Press A V to select the title then press OPTION Press A V to select Chapter View then press OK Press lt gt to select the chapter To start play Press OK To edit Step To create Press the Green button gt below Create Chapter Supp Time Remaining 15 08 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC Play gt 007 SOCCER Press OK to start playing from the selected chapter chapter can be eed DA gt previous menu 0 00 00 gt t i a io ok Qornon Cir eset SS oreTunn jl Chapter Vie Edi Chapter ark Press OPTION then press A V to select the operation then press OK Delete Chapter Refer to Chapter operations gt below Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen Press EXIT Chapter ope
132. al HDCP on HDMI Output Component Resolution This sets the video output resolution when using the component video terminal 576i 480i 576p 480p 720p 1080i e You cannot change the setting while the HDMI Video Mode is set to On e Set the HDMI Video Mode to Off and set the AV1 Output to Video with component or S Video with component e If it is set to 720p images other than 720p will be output as 1080 e Even if you select 720p or 1080i the video output resolution is restricted to 576p 480p when freesat programmes in HD quality is output DVD Video discs DivX and BD Video discs recorded at a rate of 50 fields per second are played images via AV1 AV2 AV3 AV4 or DV input are output AV1 Output Select Video with component or S Video with component for component output progressive output Set according to the signal and terminal of the connected TV Video with component Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal S Video with component Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal RGB 1 without component Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB signal select this mode The TV screen will automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when the unit
133. al Speed copying Copies until the point cancelled EJ If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily copying to the HDD then nothing will be copied However if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to disc from the HDD then only titles completely copied at the point cancelled are copied Even if the title was not copied to the BD R DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R R DL or RW the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less Recording and playing while copying You can record or play using the HDD while high speed copying Only when high speed copying without finalising or creating Top Menu Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played Press OK to cancel the screen display To confirm the current progress Press STATUS Notes e Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered simultaneously e To play DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R and R DL on other players it is necessary to finalise them after copy To play RW on other players we recommend you Create Top Menu gt 94 but they may not play on all DVD players RQT9430 Copying a finalised DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R and R DL gt FED You can copy the content of finalised DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R and R DL to the HDD and re edit the content copied to the HDD While playing a disc the
134. aler or freesat registered dealer Preparation e Turn on the television and connected equipment and select the video input terminal that this unit is connected to TV s remote control 1 C io turn the unit on Auto Setup will start to search for TV programmes and store them in the numbered order as specified by the broadcasters Check signal quality strength displayed on the screen gt right If the signal is weak Auto Setup v will not start Check that the satellite dish is correctly positioned and connected freesat Auto Setup Radio Channels Found Data Channels Found ers The bar appears beside Signal Quality and Signal Strength when the signal is input 0 Channels found creating channel list Enter Postcode for local channels including space Postcode ee a Select Sat character Select So RETURN You now have the opportunity to enter your details and help the police to crack crime See Instruction Book Enter your Postcode 4 Press A V lt gt to select the character then Please enter new PIN press OK FIN 2 Repeat step 4 3 Press the Green button to confirm Your postcode is required to receive local services and sort the channel order Press the numbered buttons to enter your choice of a 4 digit PIN This PIN will be used only for the Owner ID Data Entry screen Tis Stuy Owner ID el o 9 Baia
135. an colour difference Pr Chrominance signal colour difference Satellite input terminals gt 10 11 AUDIO VIDEO output terminals gt 113 114 HDMI AV OUT terminal gt 10 112 AV4 input terminals Digital audio and video output terminal S VIDEO output terminal 0 0 gt 113 LAN terme atest cisaidsteneem macnn gt 115 Digital audio output terminal optical gt 114 AV1 TV 21 pin Scart terminal gt 10 11 112 Digital audio output terminal coaxial gt 114 TV set connection AV2 EXT 21 pin Scart terminal gt 112 _ Connection of an external unit 9 For information about the 21 pin Scart terminal gt 112 e RQT9430 Basic Connection This recorder requires 2 signal feeds from a satellite dish to be able to record 2 different channels at the same time Please consult with your Panasonic dealer for details of dish installation e Connect both satellite terminals DISH IN 1 and DISH IN 2 to the satellite dish when you want to record 2 programmes simultaneously or view TV during recording e Connect DISH IN 1 terminal to the satellite dish when you use only one terminal You cannot view if you connect only DISH IN 2 terminal In this case you cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously or view TV during recording e Supply power from another device when you use 2 or more devices to receive satellite broadcast b
136. and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD RAM 69 e You can connect a video equipment and copy HD Video to the HDD BD RE or 68 BD R e Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory e Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be formatted on this unit e Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit 23 What will happen if try to record the same CD multiple times e New album will be made following the existing album Can transfer the music tracks from HDD to the disc or USB memory e No you cannot 119 Reference RQT9430 Messages On the Unit s Display Page H LF e An error has occurred The number following H or F depends on the status of the unit Q stands for a service Check the items below and in the Troubleshooting Guide If the service number still does number not disappear after the check reset the unit gt 122 To restore the unit if it freezes e f the service numbers fail to clear note the service numbers and contact a qualified service person BD e The remote control and the main unit are using different codes Change the code 122 Q stands for a number on the remote control EXT L e This unit is in EXT LINK standby EXT LINK has been turned on and will stop 64 operation on the unit until the recording has completed Press EXT LINK
137. annot be used even if it is taken out from the cartridge e Remove the DVD RAM or 8 cm disc from the cartridge and place it on the tray TYPE1 cannot be used Refer to the instructions of the disc on how to remove the disc from the cartridge Automatic drive select function MP3 JPEG DivX e f the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped it automatically switches to the BD drive when a disc is inserted e If you eject a disc and close the disc tray the HDD drive is automatically selected Inserting Removing the USB memory Inserting the USB memory When the USB indicator USB is flashing the USB memory is being read from Do not turn off the unit or remove the USB memory Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the USB memory s contents za A e Before inserting any USB memory to this unit ensure that the data stored therein has been backed up e Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it straight in e Insert a USB device while the unit is stopped so the USB device screen is displayed Select an item and press OK to switch to the USB related operations gt 51 68 69 70 74 77 82 Removing the USB memory e Complete all USB related operations and pull the USB memory straight out e If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out then the data may be damaged Inserting Removing the SD Card When the card indicator SD on the unit s display is flashing
138. annot stop this process once you have started it e If you want to set the background play menu select or provide a disc name select Top Menu gt 96 Auto Play Select gt 96 or Disc Name gt 94 in DVD Management before finalising E To open the tray without disc finalisation Press 4 OPEN CLOSE on the main unit 121 Reference RQT9430 Troubleshooting Guide When Other Panasonic Products To reset this unit Respond to this Remote Control To reset the unit s settings Use this function to synchronize the codes for the remote control and the main unit when there are other Panasonic All the settings except for the ratings level PIN Owner products close to your unit ID and Clock etc return to the factory preset The timer With the unit stopped recording programmes are also cancelled PIN for BD Video playback DVD Video playback Child P FUNCTION MENU z ii Fu ii ae th OK Lock Parental Control and VIERA CAST ii A V to ee ein i en press K On the mainu ress Ay Y to select Setup then press OK Press and hold V CH and CH A for about 5 Press A V to select Others then press OK seconds O Press A V to select Remote Control then freesat Auto Setup gt 98 starts press OK To reset the unit s settings by using Press A V to select the code BD 1 BD 2 or the menu see page 107 BD 3 then pres
139. appears when this unit does not detect the connection to DISH IN 2 When you connect DISH IN 1 only press OK then go to step or When you connect both DISH IN 1 and 2 turn this unit off and check your connection Then perform from step e Auto Setup can take up to 45 minutes Tips To select the type Press the Blue button in step Each time you press the Blue button the type will be changed as follows All Channels gt Free TV gt Pay TV gt Radio gt Data gt Unknown gt All Channels gt To restore all channels Press the Red button and then press A V to select Restore all channels press OK in step To restore the channel Press A W to select the channel you want to restore press OK in step The check mark is displayed G RQT9430 HDD and Disc Information This unit can record to HDD and copy to the following recording media Internal BD RE r eA DVD ea DL 2 Recordings can only be made to HDD in DR mode first with the same quality as broadcasted then they can be copied to discs Instant record It can only record to HDD by pressing REC HDD Discs CF Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc Can do Cannot do Timer record It can only record to HDD when using timer recording HDD Discs i Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc Can do Cannot do Regarding Blu ray
140. at programmes gt 33 Important Notes for Recording Copying list icons and functions gt 58 To check the properties of a title and sort copying list gt 62 Notes e Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered simultaneously e Titles recorded using a different encoding system PAL or NTSC from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied e The subtitle copied with Subtitles set to Automatic cannot be turned on or off during playback e During Normal Speed Copy with Subtitles set to Automatic you cannot turn off the subtitle displayed on the television Basic Operations RQT9430 32 Deleting Titles You can delete unnecessary titles In order to save HDD capacity it is recommended that you delete the original titles in DR mode after converting them to other recording modes using DR File Conversion gt 55 Preparation e Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is connected to ELNI If the disc is protected release protection gt 94 e Press A OPEN CLOSE and insert a disc Press A OPEN CLOSE again to close the tray Important Once deleted contents cannot be recovered HDD BD RE BD RJRAMJ RI R DLI RW V 1 RI R DLI RW DELETE Navigator DRIVE 1 JER Oa few times to select the HDD or BD drive Select BD for any discs 2 With the
141. at 10 00 and end at 11 00 set 9 58 and 11 05 in step gt 29 These functions are available for freesat channels only Use Manual timer recording gt 39 to timer record Other Sat channels This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode Preparation e Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is connected to e Turn on this unit e Confirm that the clock on the unit s display is set to the correct time INPUT te T 4 a few times and select freesat then 4 CICICJIJC from Channel Genre Selection 2 C e All Channels Regional m D ayes a Tips Movies The channel genre selection Lifestyle To check programmes for which you screen appears a ee set the timer recording gt 41 Goes To cancel a timer recording Gaming amp Dating programming 20 30 24 00 21 30 eee o 308 3 A V lt gt to select the Holiday Programme Holi i aoan Beemen saat desired genre then Timer icon News Show Toso Bestia fis 1 Press A V lt gt to select the The TV Guide list appears Hot Wave programme the timer icon is displayed then press OK 2 While Delete is selected press OK 3 Press lt gt to select Yes then press O A V lt 4 gt to select the desired programme OK The timer icon disappears then To cancel a series timer recording
142. ayback 00005 37 SlideShow ses cic sete wanes renine EES 71 Software Update i iiceccee exteawea neem 111 SOUNGIHAGCK 50 20 siccrciceney Meee Leeman 88 Specifications sc sccceces jtir ei weer eameaes 134 Status Messag S secr 26s tacieccnexeecddcaesehaceees 91 Still Picture COPY av eckteie tiipiin eaka di e dented ea kas 74 Delete iceee sees nnd saa a kainai mia named ead 76 Edit u6 ccitonepotiee ained essa hewn eak ods 72 PAY cst a stia alate ass dba A sy diel E E E du 70 Subtitle DISC 2 deigwedd ea eeaea avenge Gag Mee eh erinas 88 Playback sci rc cawin teat earn deay raperi erorii 47 Switch the Audio Subtitles on the Disc Disc Menu 88 Timer Recording Check change or delete a programme 41 Manual TeCording sisi ne de eed otceegacee 39 Using the TV Guide 0 0 eee eee eee 28 29 Time Slipiz cas c 20ckcegenee eke age tec ecaekeieees 6 47 Title COPY ases ataram oe Cetin Ad we 30 31 57 63 DISTE iai epics ae cies Dacia noe eae ah ies aa tds cleared E 32 53 Edit pe chee ee pat sete ee chaps eid E E e E a age icine a a 53 Pla sisi eieae tament ee Ree Hae eee ane EEES 26 Protection es icicetenaceieweaase puir en sirr o ENES 54 TV Guides c eciieisrrenrei ssion b EES 28 43 44 TV System PAL NTSC 0 2c cece ence eee eeee 104 USB Copy HD Video reded speren teenies ol aendeaS ews 68 Copy MUSIC ceeded chee elo enen agaia ae ds 82 Copy SD Vid60 3 2 veces wesw del ota
143. back N Notes e Set Play Video AVCHD on BD RE BD R to On in the Setup menu for the disc that has high definition video AVCHD recorded by Panasonic s video camera etc and other video format such as those recorded on this unit gt 100 e Multiple titles may not playback continuously depending on the disc Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR and playback by selecting the title e It may pause for a few seconds on the break of images when editing such as partial deletion is performed e High definition video transfer rate of 24 Mbps or faster cannot be played back correctly if it was recorded on a DVD compatible to double speed or slower Playback of the playlists created on other equipment Pra EP Ss G00 ES Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit Preparation e Insert a disc e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the BD drive With the unit stopped A Y to select Others then he IGA ANTONIE Ovvo RAM Time Remaining 4 00 EP Eakin standby Playiss i COV Automatic Recording _ Recording via AVS input ewo J DVD Management Gja A S AORETURN 3 A Y to select Playlists then Y lt P to select the playlist then Playlists Playlist View DVD RAM Previous Page 01 01 Next 3 OPTION SS neum Operation during play gt 45 to 47 Advanced Playback
144. be performed while recording orcopyingia title m Aan an aE E cence E a E 116 Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation 116 Media Disc USB Memory SD Card Handling 117 Frequently Asked Questions 205005 118 MessageS creires cece cece ec eee eee eee eens 120 When removing a recorded disc 0 00000 121 Troubleshooting Guide 20 00e eee eeeee 122 SpecificationS 0 cece eee 134 Copyright etC er ansni dina a a 137 GlOSSaly ies Mowe ous EEEO E E TE O G 138 Safety precautions 000 cece eee eee 140 INGOX sperei noruda ahid a ate tae ia dem ewer 142 About descriptions in these operating instructions e These operating instructions are applicable to models DMR BS850 and DMR BS750 Unless otherwise indicated illustrations in these operating instructions are DMR BS850 indicates features applicable to DMR BS850 only indicates features applicable to DMR BS750 only e Pages to be referred to are indicated as gt O O Quick Start Guide Basic Operations Recording Playing Back to S ke W Da gt Q e S _ gs BE 2 23 Su 2 wo 5 T S S 5 Functions Reference RQT9430 HDD Hard disk drive Handling Care The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device t
145. blem with the unit e Regular disc rotating sound e Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions e Image disturbance during search e Periodic interruptions to the reception due to satellite broadcasting breaks e Operations are slow to respond when Power Save is set to On e Operations are not working due to a poor quality disc Try again using a Panasonic disc e The unit freezing due to the activation of one of its safety devices gt above To restore the unit if it freezes e When the unit is turned on or off there may be an unexpected sound RQT9430 General Issues Power Page No power e Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains 10 11 The unit does not turn on pressing Socket o o e Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby 64 EXT L on the units display blinks when b is pressed Press EXT LINK to cancel the recording standby The unit switches to standby e One of the unit s safety devices is activated Press cb on the main unit to E mode turn the unit on The unit is turned in standby e If you connected this unit to an HDAVI Control compatible TV with an HDMI 86 automatically cable or connected this unit to a Q Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21 pin Scart cable this unit will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode This unit turns
146. cally adjusts the time several times a day If the clock is incorrect or cannot be automatically set perhaps due to bad signal reception you will need to adjust the clock manually e In the case of a power failure the clock setting remains in memory for approximately 60 minutes 9 Press A W to change the setting 10 Press OK to confirm new date and time and to initiate the clock 1 Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A V to select Others then press OK 3 Press A V to select Setup then press OK 4 Press A V to select Others then press OK 5 Press A V to select Clock then press OK 6 Press lt gt to select Off of Auto Clock Setting 7 Press A V to select Manual Setting then press OK 8 Press lt gt to select the item you want to change Hour lt Minute Second lt Day lt Month lt Year t f Quick Start Guide Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen Press EXIT Notes If a TV station transmits a time setting signal and when Auto Clock Setting in the Clock setting menu is set to On the automatic time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted several times every day RQT9430 Tuning in Other Satellite Services You can also view or record other free channels Astra 2 at 28 5 degree east or free channels from other
147. cast programme as conventional analogue conventional analogue compressed High broadcast broadcast Definition data Record by automatically adjusting the quality MPEG 4 AVC H 264 between XP and EP encoding 8 hours depending on the remaining area on the disc Quality that can Quality same as Quality produced by SD quality only be recorded broadcasted conversion of broadcast HD quality and SD data HD quality and SD quality quality Multiple audio Record all multiple audio Record only one audio gt 33 Subtitles Can be recorded Can be recorded gt 33 The audio of the Surround audio as the Surround audio produced Stereo audio surround broadcast by conversion of programme broadcast audio format 1 The subtitles cannot be switched on or off during playback 2 If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz surround audio is mixed and recorded in front LR channels Audio will be output from two front speakers only even if you play it on 5 1 ch speaker connection E Recording method O Possible Impossible Recording method Recording DR R etie ose cee D IEEE OE A 1 1 HG HX HE HL hehe ea Airea Bogi aie ere EEEn _ XP SP LP EP FR Timer Recording DR AV Input Flexible Recording via Recording via AV3 input t pot er orari eye r EEEO DV Automatic Recording i i E eet eee we ee EE FR
148. cast select the type of audio in advance from Bilingual Audio Selection gt 102 Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast Selects the initial setting for Audio tracks If programme has both Dolby Digital and MPEG audio tracks priority is given to what you select Only the selected audio is recorded when copied in HG HX HE HL XP SP LP EP or FR recording mode It is recorded in accordance with the setting of Multi Audio AD in the Disc menu only when it is copied with Copy Title Playing Automatic Automatically selects the audio tracks if programme has more than two tracks The priority is given in the following order Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital MPEG MPEG An audio compression method that compresses audio to small size without any considerable loss of audio quality Audio Channels for HG HX HE HL Recording This will set the audio when converting to the HDD in HG HX HE or HL modes gt 55 5 1 channel Record using 5 1 ch audio 2 channel Record using 2 ch audio If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz surround audio is mixed and recorded in front LR channels Audio will be output from two front speakers only even if you play it on 5 1 ch speaker connection Audio Mode for XP Recording Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode Dolby Digital gt 138 LPCM gt 139 e The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
149. casts of 480i 525i the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image 1080p In one high definition image 1080 1125 scan lines pass at the same time every 1 50th of a second to create a progressive image Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace there is a minimal amount of screen flicker 24p This is a progressive image recorded at a rate of 24 frames per second 720p In one high definition image 720 750 scan lines pass at the same time every 1 50th of a second to create a progressive image Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace there is a minimal amount of screen flicker RQT9430 Reference Safety precautions CAUTION THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL Placement Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight high temperatures high humidity and excessive vibration These conditions can damage the cabinet and other components thereby shortening the unit s service life Do not place heavy items on the unit Voltage Do not use high voltage power sources This can overload the unit and cause a fire Do not use a DC power source Check the source carefully when setting the un
150. ceiving a programme with surround audio gt 35 e When recording in DR mode When copying the title recorded in DR mode at high speed It is recorded as is e When copying in HG HX HE HL modes It is recorded with surround audio that was converted from broadcasted audio format e When copying in XP SP LP EP FR modes It is recorded with stereo audio Copy restriction on freesat programmes Some programmes on freesat channels are copy restricted and the number of times you can copy in DR HG HX HE HL mode is assigned by the broadcaster The titles which have the copy restriction are indicated in Direct Navigator Delete Navigator and copy source selection screen with the following icons 02 Titles with the HD No Copy restriction e Converting recording mode with DR File Conversion After converted to HG HX HE HL mode the converted title retains the HD No Copy restriction and the original title is automatically deleted after conversion e Copying You cannot select High Speed HG HX HE HL mode when copying to BD RE or BD R TO Titles with the HD Copy Once restriction e Converting recording mode with DR File Conversion After converted to HG HX HE HL mode the converted title will retain the HD Copy Once restriction and the original title is automatically deleted after conversion e Copying After copying in High Speed HG HX HE HL to BD RE or BD R the original title and the cop
151. cessing the Management Menus gt 94 Press A V to select Create Top Menu then press OK O Press lt to select Yes then press OK Press lt q to select Start then press OK Create Top Menu cannot be cancelled once started Create Top Menu takes a few minutes A message appears when Create Top Menu is finished Press OK to complete Notes e Recording or editing on the disc may delete the top menu In that case create the top menu again e You cannot use the top menu for playing on this unit Setup Menu You can change the unit s settings using Setup menu Accessing the Setup Menu With the unit stopped Channel Settings gt a gt Others Setup Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A V to select Others then press OK DIGA noe HDD Time Remaining 30 00 DR 53 Playback Recording DV Automatic Recording 2 Copy Network _ _ _ _ _ TV Guide seup ____ Others Ext Link Standby OK ORETURN Press A V to select Setup then press OK Press A V to select the menu then press OK Press A V to select the item you want to change Options O Press lt gt to select the option e Follow the instruction on the screen if the operation method is different For Setting details refer to pages 97 107 109 110
152. content being played is copied to the HDD according to the set time e When Recording Format for DVD gt 101 is set to Video format and you make a copy the copy will be made using the picture size selected in Aspect for Recording gt 101 of the Setup menu e Operations and on screen displays during copy are also recorded e Almost all DVD Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying and cannot be copied e The following cannot be copied Video CD Audio CD and so on When the top menu is displayed Press A V lt gt to select the title you want to start copying then press OK My favourite 01 02 4 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 m While playing in order all the titles after the selected title are recorded until the set time After the last title on the disc has finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is reached Preparation Tips To return to the previous screen in steps Press BACK RETURN 4 To stop copying after step Press W You can also press and hold BACK RETURN 4 for 3 seconds to stop copying e If stopped partway copying will be up to that point e Insert the finalised disc gt 117 After performing steps Format is automatically set to DVD Video gt 61 Copying using the copying list Copy O Set Copy Time If you are not going to change the s
153. cted the HDMI audio output of this unit is limited to down mixed 2 ch Bitstream Select Bitstream when the connected equipment can decode the respective audio format Connect equipment supporting HDMI Ver 1 3 and use a High Speed HDMI Cable in order to output high bit rate audio such as Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS HD High Resolution Audio or DTS HD Master Audio Select PCM when the connected equipment cannot decode the respective audio format PCM Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats Set the speaker output on the amplifier when output with PCM 1 The default setting is PCM 2 The default setting is Bitstream BD Video Secondary Audio ERBI with secondary audio Turn on off the clicking sound on the menu and audio with secondary video On The sampling frequency is converted to 48 kHz Audio will be converted to Dolby Digital during playback of the BD Video with secondary audio when Bitstream gt above is selected Off Output in original audio method Audio Mode for DV Input Select the kind of audio when recording from the unit s DV input terminal gt 65 Stereo 1 Records audio L1 R1 Stereo 2 Records added audio such as narration L2 R2 subsequent to original recording Mix Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 When recording bilingual broad
154. d bitstream or down mixed 2ch PCM e g TV When playing BD Video without secondary audio or clicking sound the audio is output as the same format as if BD Video Secondary Audio was set to Off in the Setup menu gt 103 3 When the connected equipment is not supported with multi channel surround the audio is output as down mixed 2ch PCM When the connected equipment is supported with 7 1 channel surround the audio output is amplified from 5 1ch or 6 1ch to 7 1ch depending on the DTS Inc specifications 5 With PCM output Dolby Digital EX becomes PCM audio decoded as Dolby Digital DTS ES recorded to DVD Video becomes PCM audio decoded as DTS Digital Surround and DTS ES recorded to BD Video becomes PCM audio decoded as DTS ES a When BD Video Secondary Audio is set to On in the Setup menu Dolby Digital EX is output as Dolby Digital and DTS ES is output as DTS Digital Surround however if playing BD Video without secondary audio or clicking sound the audio is output as the original format Notes e When setting BD Video Secondary Audio to Off in the Setup menu the clicking sound on the menu and audio with secondary video in picture in picture mode gt 49 cannot be output Regarding 24p output Many BD Video movie contents are recorded in 24 frames second in accordance with the film materials However they will normally be output in 60 frames second in accordance with the display format T
155. d for Soundtrack is not available subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available on the disc Settings for Recording Press OK to show the following settings Recording time in EP mode Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode gt 36 Recording modes and approximate recording time 6 hours You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4 7 GB disc 8 hours You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4 7 GB disc e The sound quality is better when using 6 hours than when using 8 hours Aspect for Recording Sets the aspect ratio when recording in HX HG HE HL XP SP LP EP FR mode Automatic The programme will be recorded in the original aspect used when recording started including when recording started at a commercial etc 16 9 4 3 e In the following cases the programme will be recorded with the original aspect ratio EA EDM When the recording mode is set to XP SP LP EP or FR EAJ GLU When the recording mode is set to XP SP LP EP or FR with the Recording Format for DVD set to VR format e In the following cases even when set to Automatic or 16 9 recordings will be made or copied in 4 3 When the recording mode is set to EP or FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode When recording to a R R DL and RW Recording Format for D
156. d on a PC you may not be able to use it on this unit In these cases format the card on this unit gt 95 138 e This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format e SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card compatible equipment SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards e We recommend using a Panasonic SD card e Keep the SD Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing Setting the protection Switch the write protect switch to the LOCK position a M 23 RQT9430 24 Watching Television freesat Selecting a channel with TV Guide Refer to TV Guide system freesat gt 43 for detailed information This unit can receive and record digital satellite channels Preparation Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is connected to Important This unit has only digital satellite tuners Q to turn the unit on INPUT 3 5 2 a few times and select freesat then Se sel News amp Sport The Channel Genre Selection esii screen appears Lifestyle Music Children Special Interest Shopping Gaming amp Dating A V lt P to select the desired genre then G4 The TV Guide list appears
157. d on the copying list 1 Press A V to select Delete All then press OK 2 Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Add Add new items to the copying list 1 Press A W to select Add then press OK 2 Press A V to select the title then press H A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary items e Press II again to cancel 3 Press OK Delete the selected items 1 Press A W to select Delete then press OK 2 Press lt d gt to select Yes then press OK Delete Move Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list 1 Press A V to select Move then press OK 2 Press A V to select the destination then lt N press OK 61 ae RQT9430 Copying Titles Cancel all registered copying setting and lists After performing steps gt 61 Press A V to select Cancel All then press OK O Press lt 4 to select Yes then press OK e The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations When a title still picture etc has been recorded or deleted at the copy source When steps have been taken for instance to turn off the unit remove the card open the tray change the copy direction etc About the data size for copying Data size of each registered item Ce Data size recorded to the copy destinatio
158. d prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries please contact your local municipality your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with national legislation For business users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment please contact your dealer or supplier for further information Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union These symbols are only valid in the European Union If you wish to discard these items please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal Note for the battery symbol bottom two symbol examples This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical Cd involved CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 8 2 Back of product DANGER VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM FDA21 CFR Class Mb CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM IEC60825 1 A2 Class 3B ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE
159. d sided RW 4 7 GB 9 4 GB 4 7 GB oF 37 hours 3 hours 7 hours High Definition 77 hours Quality 14 Mbps 30 min 30 min 30 min DR 10 hour Standard Definition 215 hours 105 hours 15 i 21 hours Quality 5 Mbps HG 80 hours 40 hours 4 hours 8 hours HX 120 hours 60 hours 6 hours 12 hours HE 180 hours 90 hours 9 hours 18 hours HL 240 hours 120 hours 12 hours 24 hours om XP 110 hours 55 hours 5 hours 15 min 10 hours 30 min 1 hour 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour 45 min SP 220 hours 110 hours 10 hours 30 min 21 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours 3 hours 35 min LP 442 hours 221 hours 21 hours 42 hours 4 hours 8 hours 4 hours 7 hours 10 min EP s 885 hours 441 hours 42 hours 84 hours 8 hours 16 hours 8 hours 14 hours 20 min 664 hours 331 hours 31 hours 30 min 63 hours 6 hours 12 hours 6 hours 10 hours 45 min 1 Recording time of DR mode depends on bit rate of broadcasting It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other 3 When recording to the HDD in EP or FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode you cannot perform high speed copy to R R DL or RW discs 4 When Recording time in EP mode is set to 6 hours in the Setup menu 101 The sound quality is better when using 6 hours than when using 8 hours e GW When recording to DVD RAM using 8 hours
160. d subtitle cannot be switched during playback e If Off is selected Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied Finalise or Create Top Menu GED gt EG ETS EG EG EG EG only 2 Press A V to select Finalise or Create Top Menu then press OK 3 Press A V to select On or Off then press OK If On is selected EA After finalising the discs become play only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment However you can no longer record or edit Create the Top Menu Top Menu is a convenient function We recommend you create the menu before playing a RW disc on other equipment Audio Description Normal Speed Copy only 2 Press A V to select Audio Description then press OK 3 Press A V to select Automatic or Off then press OK e If Automatic is selected If title recorded in DR mode includes Audio Description the title will be copied with Audio Description e If Off is selected Title recorded in DR mode will be copied without Audio Description Press lt q to confirm Q Press A V to select Start Copying then press OK Press lt d to select Yes then press OK to start copying Edit the copying list Select the item after step 4 gt left Press OPTION Delete All Add Delete Move Delete All Delete all items registere
161. d time by TV magazine etc and correct if necessary using A V lt gt then 20 30 21 00 21 30 SOS Red Cap Timer icon Holiday Programme The timer icon is displayed when the settings are stored and the timer programme is on lights on the unit s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated Repeat steps to programme other recordings Press ob to turn the unit off Guide Link will not be displayed and will not function under the following conditions Timer programmes set manually gt 39 Timer programmes set from the TV Guide are modified or start stop time changed by more than 10 minutes from original time Timer programmes set from the TV Guide with the start time modified to later time or the stop time modified to earlier time than the original time Recording the ITV HD etc programme When ITV programme is also broadcast the unit offers to select HD SD programme based on the signal sent from the broadcaster You can record the ITV HD programme using this unit After performing steps to select a programme gt 28 5 A V io select Single Timer Rec then Q Little League Champion 103 ITV1 Wales Sport port TUE 10 03 2009 19 30 22 00 6 A Y to select the HD programme for recording then This screen will only appear if there is an HD broadcast of the programme Programme Selection MON 09 03 2009 22
162. dby Power Save setting is required to be activated on the TV e When turning this unit on or off without using Power off link function this unit will not turn to Power Save states Direct TV Recording a Preparation Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21 pin Scart cable gt 10 11 112 Notes The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function to Q Link from Panasonic For details refer to your television s operating instructions or consult your dealer e Q Link registered trademark of Panasonic e DATA LOGIC registered trademark of Metz e Easy Link registered trademark of Philips e Megalogic registered trademark of Grundig e SMARTLINK registered trademark of Sony This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV e Depending on the TV type connected with this unit this function may not work if you select the TV channels on this unit e The titles are recorded to the HDD e When the Digital Teletext gt 91 is displayed intended image may not be recorded e If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording the Direct TV recording stops e When EXT L lights on the unit s display gt 64 Direct TV recording is unavailable To stop recording Press W Notes e These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition e About VIERA Link
163. ding after freesat Auto Setup Please reset it if the setting information is not correct Recordings on the HDD are not be deleted 1 Press A V to select freesat Auto Setup then press OK When the confirmation screen appears 2 Press lt to select Yes then press OK Tips e You can also use the following method to restart freesat Auto Setup When the unit is turned on and stopped press and hold V CH and CH A on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds freesat Auto Setup screen appears Other Satellite Channel List You can set channel list of other satellite services 1 Press A V to select Other Satellite Channel List then press OK 2 Press A V to select the channel e Press the Red button to delete the channel e Press the Green button to swap the channel And press the numbered buttons to enter the channel number you want to swap then press OK e Press the Yellow button to sort channels e Press the Blue button to profile the channel To hide unwanted channels Press OK The check mark disappears You cannot select it by pressing A V CH But you can select it by pressing the numbered buttons to enter the channel number directly Press OK again to reveal Other Satellite Tuning Menu You can tune channels from other satellites e Press OK to show the following settings Other Satellite Tuning Menu Auto Setup Manual
164. disc end point during Partial Delete The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power operation e These operations are not possible with still pictures e You cannot set points if they are too close to each other You cannot set an end point before a start point Cannot delete chapters HDD GYM When the chapter is too short to delete use Combine 56 Chapters to make the chapter longer The available recording time e Available space on BD R DVD R DVD R DL R or R DL does not increase doesn t increase even after even after deleting previous titles deleting titles on the disc e Available space on DVD RW DVD Video format or RW increases when you delete the last title Cannot create a playlist e Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit Editing Issues Still Pictures Page The contents of the card cannot e Remove the card from the slot and then insert again If this does not solve the be read problem turn off and turn on the unit again e The card format is not compatible with the unit The contents on the card may 23 be damaged This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format e The card contains a folder structure and or file extensions that are not 135 136 compatible with this unit e You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and SDHC Memory Card
165. e The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warranties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DA
166. e Press OK gt 84 Entering Text Drive Mode Renew Oo The timer icon is displayed in left column Timer icon lights on the unit s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated Check for available space on HDD etc when P is displayed de sle 1 Repeat steps O to programme other recordings Press o to turn the unit off Notes e on the unit s display flashes when the unit cannot go to timer recording standby e g HDD has no space to record e If three timer recording times overlap the first and second recordings always have priority The third recording will start only after the first recording has finished Tips To exit the timer recording list Press PROG CHECK e Date Setting Each press of A changes items in the order below Each press of W changes items in the reverse order Current date One month later minus one day Each press of the Green button changes item in the order below You can perform this operation when you select a box of Day Date Date lt gt Weekly Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are bundled and displayed as a group in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen gt 45 except when using Auto Renewal Recording gt 41 e You can also use the numbered buttons to enter Channel Start and Stop Recordin
167. e Proxy Server Settings back Proxy Address The initial setting is blank Proxy Port Number The initial setting is O Connection Test Network Service gt 110 e Press OK to show the following settings Network Lock You can restrict using VIERA CAST Follow the on screen instructions Enter a 4 digit PIN with the numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown It will be the common PIN for DVD Video Ratings BD Video Ratings Child Lock Parental Control and Network Lock e Do not forget your PIN On Off Automatic Volume Control On Off Select Off when the audio is warped while using VIERA CAST Picture Zoom In The picture is enlarged Out The picture is reduced e Select Out when display of the contents is truncated System Settings gt Others gt Setup gt 97 Accessing the Setup Menu All factory default settings are indicated with Underlined text Others A V select Others gt N Ch Others si Automatic Standby Remote Control Clock Owner ID PIN Entry Power Save System Update DivX Registration Initialize on Automatic Standby Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used 2 hours 4 hours 6 hours Off Remote Control gt 122 BD 1 BD 2 BD 3 Cloc
168. e programme Icons Timi Rerording Remain HLN 30 30 DR P Channel Name Schedule Drive Mo je Space Gd MON 09 03 HDD OK 22 00 23 00 DR Guide MON 09 03 23 05 23 35 DR MON 09 03 23 15 23 30 DR Guide MON 09 03 23 20 23 50 DR Jimer Programme Total 4 32 Turn Timer Off DEL Delete Info Resolve overlap PageuP A Page Down CH Gi ORETURN Red Timer recording standby is activated Grey Timer recording standby is not activated Currently recording You stopped a daily weekly or series timer recording The icon disappears when the next timer recording starts recording Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording gt left Recording drive is set to HDD Recordable gt Date For daily weekly or series timer recordings the display g B Guide s P S will show until when recordings can be made up to one month ahead from the present time based on the time remaining on the HDD It may not be possible to record because there is no more space left the number of possible titles has reached its maximum programmes are overlapped you stopped a daily weekly or series timer recording Programmes are overlapped Recording of the programme with the later start time starts when the earlier programme finishes recording freesat programme is selected Other Sat programme is selected Guide Link gt 28 Spl
169. e Slow motion gt 46 and Frame by Frame gt 47 DR File Conversion HDD DR File Conversion is a function to convert the recording mode of the title in DR mode The converted title will be copied to HDD It will take about the same time as playback of the title to convert the recording mode Perform steps of Accessing the Title View gt 53 Select HDD in step O Press A V to select DR File Conversion then press OK Convert the selected title by changing its recording mode Please select recording mode and other options then press OK Enter Title Name Set up Protection Cancel Protection Partial Delete Divide Title Change Thumbnail Recording Mode DR File Conversion O Press lt gt to select the recording mode then press V Q Press lt gt to select Automatic or Off then press V O Press lt gt to select Automatic or Off then press V Press lt gt to select when to start the conversion then press OK Now Conversion begins immediately Recording and playback are not available during conversion Note also that timer recording will not be performed during conversion Press lt gt to select Start then press OK During standby The conversion will be performed a short time after switching off
170. e available gt 95 HDD RAM To recover total disc space the disc needs to be formatted gt 95 101 Important Notes for Recording Recording to HDD Recording or timer recording is performed in DR mode using this unit s tuner e Recording or timer recording from external equipment is performed in XP SP LP EP or FR mode Recording to discs CEA EDS G0 EG EG EG EG Recording on the discs is performed using Recording via AV3 input gt 67 and DV Automatic Recording gt 66 Recording to DVD R DL and R DL You cannot directly record to a DVD R DL and R DL disc on this unit Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc Recording mode Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs gt 35 High definition quality image Quality of titles to be recorded differs depending on the recording mode gt 35 e When recording in DR mode When copying the title recorded in DR mode at high speed Recorded as high definition quality e When copying in HG HX HE HL modes Recorded as high definition quality with compressed broadcast data e When copying in XP SP LP EP FR modes Recorded as standard definition quality Broadcast in multi channel sound You can select the audio language when receiving audio in multi channel broadcast using this unit s tuner Multi Audio appears at the bottom of digital satellite channel informatio
171. e changed repeat this procedure When the TV is off and the following operations are performed the TV will automatically turn on and display the corresponding action Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds Press FUNCTION MENU gt PLAY DIRECT NAVIGATOR GUIDE PROG CHECK etc The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs Oeod VIERA Link What is Q Link Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit and a Panasonic TV You can use this function by connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21 pin Scart cable When you turn the TV off the unit is also automatically turned in standby The unit is automatically turned in standby even if the FUNCTION MENU screen the status message or the on screen display is displayed during playback or when the unit is set to a timer recording Even if the TV is turned in standby the unit will not be turned in standby at the same time when recording copying finalising etc e When this unit is connected to an VIERA Link compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable the receiver will also turn off About the Standby Power Save function Even with Power Save set to Off gt 107 this unit turns to Power Save states gt 14 when Power off link works so it is possible to reduce the power consumption while this unit is in standby mode e Stan
172. e distortion occurs Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds This means you can listen at low volumes but still hear dialogue clearly Film and video DVD Videos are recorded using either film or video This unit can determine which type has been used then uses the most suitable method of progressive output Film Recorded at 25 frames per second PAL discs or 24 frames per second NTSC discs NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames per second as well Generally appropriate for motion picture films Video Recorded at 25 frames 50 fields per second PAL discs or 30 frames 60 fields per second NTSC discs Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation Finalise A process that makes play of a recorded CD R CD RW DVD R etc possible on equipment that can play such media You can finalise BD R DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R R DL on this unit After finalising the disc becomes play only and you can no longer record or edit However finalised DVD RW can be formatted for recording again Folder This is a place on the hard disk disc or SD card where groups of data are stored together In the case of this unit it refers to the place where still pictures JPEG and MPEG2 etc are stored Formatting Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD RAM recordable on recording equipment You can format BD RE DVD RAM DVD RW only as DVD Vid
173. e screen with VIERA CAST for example YouTube Picasa Web Albums Current as of February 2009 e Enjoying VIERA CAST 85 Linked operations with the TV You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using VIERA Link or Q Link e Linked operations with the TV VIERA Link HDAVI Control Q Link gt 86 e Eco LINK to save power consumption e Pause Live TV gt 93 VIERA Copy high definition video It is possible to input high definition video AVCHD from the Panasonic s video camera etc e Copying HD Video AVCHD format gt 68 Easy access to various functions You can access the main function quickly and easily ffom FUNCTION MENU display e FUNCTION MENU display gt 92 Ft Select a function You can access selected function easily ing 45 54 y CAM TWIN HD Satellite Tuner It is possible to record 2 programmes being broadcasted at the same time gt 38 Accessories ee Please check and identify the supplied accessories Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts Product numbers correct as of April 2009 These may be subject to change ea 1 Remote control N2QAYB000337 2 Batteries for remote control R6 Size E Sales and Support Information Customer Care Centre e For customers within the UK 084
174. e the TV 108 Network SettingS sso sisceccceinees cerwiie were ce 109 Testingthe connection e ey r e a ee ace ene een 109 SettingthelPiaddress n meree eee a e E eee 109 Setting the DNSIP ee oeae a E E eas 109 Setting the connection speed s sssaaa rannen 109 Setting the proxy Sever arri ra ae E E E a R 110 Setting the network service VIERA CAST 110 Software Update o secr aaneen graen EEr EaR ences 111 If a software update is available a notification is displayed 111 The unit s display during the update 111 Reference Additional Connections 0 00020eeeeee 112 Adding a VCR Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder 00 0000s 112 Adding a Digital Satellite or Cable Receiver Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite or Cable Receiver 112 Using an Audio Video Cable not included 113 Using an S Video Cable not included 00 113 Using Component Video Cables not included 113 Using an Audio Cable not included for Better Sound 114 Using a Optical Digital Audio Cable not included for Better Sound 00 00000 cee 114 Connecting with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface Terminal 0 cece ee eee eee eee 114 Network connection 000 cece e eee eee 115 Operations that can be performed simu ltaneousiy aa 116 Operations that can
175. ecause this unit does not supply power when it is turned in standby Before connection turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions READ THE CAUTION FOR THE AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3 BEFORE CONNECTION When your Television has an HDMI input terminal When connected to an HDMI compatible unit an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted enabling you to enjoy high quality digital video and audio with just one cable When connecting to an HDMI compatible HDTV High Definition Television the output can be switched to 1080p 1080i or 720p HD video Regarding VIERA Link HDAVI Control function When connecting with a Panasonic TV VIERA or a receiver equipped with the HDAVI Control function linked operations would be possible gt 86 Linked Operations with the TV VIERA Link HDAVI Control Q Link e Non HDMI compliant cables cannot be utilized e It is recommended that you use Panasonic s HDMI cable Recommended part number RP CDHG10 1 0 m RP CDHG15 1 5 m RP CDHG20 2 0 m RP CDHG30 3 0 m RP CDHG50 5 0 m etc A When your television does not have a digital satellite tuner TV Connecting with a Panasonic TV VIERA If the 21 pin Scart cable is connected the Direct TV Recording and Pause Live TV function is available gt 37 HDMI IN AV mmm DISH IN 1 rsh saa DISH IN 2 To househo d Pa HD
176. ed D OK to continue the Oj Auto Setup Ensure that signals to both DISH IN 1 and 2 are locked before starting scan 15 OK a to start the scan 7 The scan starts 16 Delete unwanted channels To delete all channels of each type on the screen other than Free TV press the Red button And then press A Y to select the channel type you want to delete press OK Other Satellite Auto Setup All other satellite tuning data will be erased Continue e RETURN Other Satellite Auto Setup Satellite Scan Please wait This may take up to 45 minutes to complete Free TV Channels found 0 ooo Free Radio Channels found jo if Data Channels found 0 ooo Pay TV Channels found o SSS Other Satellite Auto Setup Select Channels to Remove 1 19 All Channels Name Type Keep ETV2 Free TV BBC 1 Wales Free TV BBC 2 Wales Free TV BBC 1 Scotland Free TV BBC 2 Scotland Free TV select Kept Channels 111 Available Space 2888 RETURN FoundChannels 111 HI Multiple delete Hl EE OE Channel type Remove To remove the selected channel press A W to select the channel gr want to remove press OK The check mark is removed RETURN Go to confirm deletion Notes e When the below screen appears after step Other satellite Auto Setup fl sonal aac at a 2p Please check diah nals connect bef 1g search recor lybarktaneton wtb ia This screen
177. ed in order to play DivX Video on Demand VOD content First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and submit it during the registration process Important DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX DRM Digital Rights Management system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device the message Authorisation Error will be displayed and your content will not play Learn more at www divx com vod Display the unit s registration code gt 107 DivX Registration in Others menu Divx Registration DivX Video On Demand Your registration code is KONA 8 alphanumeric characters To learn more visit www divx com vod e After playing DivX VOD content for the first time another registration code is then displayed in DivX Registration Do not use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content If you use this code to purchase DivX VOD content and then play the content on this unit you will no longer be able to play any content that you purchased using the previous code e If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code different from this unit s code you will not be able to play this content Authorisation Error is displayed Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of times Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times When yo
178. el is displayed gt right e While playing a title etc A Pause V Stop lt 4 Search pe RR backward gt Search forward OK Play NA EXIT Exit the screen a e While playing still pictures V Stop lt 4 View previous picture gt View next picture EXIT Exit the screen E When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode Press o on this unit s remote control and set to standby mode E When not using HDAVI Control Set VIERA Link in the Setup menu to Off gt 105 a Exit a S a e S RQT9430 Functions Setting On Screen Display Accessing the On Screen Display When playing discs except for JPEG discs you can display and set the options including disc audio subtitle image quality sound effect Repeat Play etc In addition when receiving the multi channel broadcast you can change the audio settings Menu options will differ based on disc type and contents Press DISPLAY Disc Soundtrack Eel Play Audio channel Picture Sound Other L Menu l Item Setting Press A V to select a menu then press gt Press A Y to select an item then press gt Press A V to select a setting Follow the on screen prompts to change individual settings Notes e Some settings may not be changeable based on the unit s current activity playing stopped etc and di
179. em persists consult your freesat registered dealer message is displayed e Interference known as impulse noise from household appliances such as light switches fridges etc may cause picture break up and or audio distortion Use a high quality quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup If problem persists consult your freesat registered dealer e When No Signal message is displayed check satellite dish connection e Perform freesat Auto Setup in the Setup menu 98 Picture very infrequently breaks up Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lighting storms on some or all channels or heavy rain and or wind may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort momentarily e Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a noisy ignition system The digital satellite channel e Select the length of time 3 10 sec in the On Screen Messages in the Setup menu 104 information does not appear e The digital satellite channel information will not appear during playback No Digital TEXT e When subtitle is on or additional information in the digital satellite channel Some functions of digital text do information is displayed Digital TEXT does not work not work e New functions introduced by broadcasters cannot be guaranteed to work After the Auto setup
180. eo format RW SD cards and the HDD or unused BD R R and R DL on this unit Formatting permanently deletes all contents Frames and fields Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see on your television Each frame consists of two fields Frame Field Field e A frame still shows two fields so there may be some blurring but picture quality is generally better e A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher but there is no blurring Gateway IP address of the electronic device providing Internet access Usually called a router IP address e g 192 168 0 1 HDD Hard disk drive This is a mass data storage device used in computers etc A disk with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is soun and a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading and writing of large amounts of data at high speed HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface Unlike conventional connections it transmits uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable This unit supports high definition video output 720p 750p 1080i 1125i 1080p 1125p from HDMI AV OUT terminals To enjoy high definition video a high definition compatible television is required Hub Used for connecting more than one device to the network IP address A set of numbers which distinguish each PC on the network when for example connected to the Internet
181. equipment is in recording standby EXT L on the unit s display blinks when b is pressed Press EXT LINK to cancel the recording standby If the HOLD function is activated above operation does not work Cancel the HOLD function Startup is slow e Startup takes time in the following situations A disc other than a DVD RAM is inserted The clock is not set Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable e Set Power Save to Off in the Setup menu If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV VIERA with the Standby Power Save setting activated on the TV even with Power Save set to Off when the TV is in Standby mode the unit may take some time to startup 107 General Issues TV Guide Page The TV Guide system does not receive any data e Check whether the clock is properly set e If signal quality is bad ghost images or limited reception the TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data Check the connection and retune unit 15 98 The empty field is displayed for some or all stations e Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system e Programme the Timer recording manually 39 The TV Guide information is not displayed properly e There was a programme change or TV Guide information from a broadcast station was possibly not correctly transmitted
182. er TV etc The television has a Scart terminal and component video input terminal Which terminal should connect with e If you have a regular television CRT cathode ray tube we recommend using the Scart terminal You can enjoy high quality RGB video from this unit by connecting to an RGB compatible television If you have an LCD plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan connect through the component video terminals for high quality progressive video If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is compatible with progressive scan we cannot recommend progressive output as some flickering can occur Is my TV progressive output compatible e All Panasonic televisions that have 625 576 50i 50p 525 480 60i 60p input terminals are compatible Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of TV When are the software updates broadcast e The unit shows automatically when a software update has been broadcast and also automatically updates the software if this function has not been switched off in the Setup menu Can play BD Video DVD Video bought in another country e Playback of the following discs is not possible BD Video discs that do not include region B DVD Video discs that do not include region 2 or ALL Refer to the disc s jacket for more information Can a BD Video DVD Video that does no
183. era eae ae ee 84 Enjoying VIERA CAST 2 cece eee eee 85 Linked Operations with the TV VIERA Link HDAVI Control Q Link 86 Easy control only with VIERA remote control 87 Setting On Screen Display 000eeee eee 88 Accessing the On Screen Display 00 0000 88 Information Messages 00 000 eee eee eee 90 Digital Satellite Channel Information 005 90 Status MeSSages isone doreak on enaa ene eaae bade 91 Convenient Functions sasassasnannsnsnnnn 92 FUNCTION MENU display 0 000 cee eee eee 92 Switch the aspect ratio of the screen 04 92 To pause the TV programme you are watching PAUSES LIVE TEV 5 aiea e anian a nace DANE nl NE seem un ina 93 Disc and Card Management 0020ee0e 94 Accessing the Management Menus 0 94 Setup Menu 0 0c c cece eee eee eee 97 Accessing the Setup Menu 02 e eee eee eee 97 Channel Settings 0 0 e cece eee eee 97 HDD Dise SettingS sce ccetsebe seers eee dae 100 Picture and Sound Settings 0 00eeeeee 102 Display and Connection Settings 104 Network Settings 00 c sees eee ee eens 106 System Settings 000eeceecee eres ewes 107 Other Settings isc iss see che cmewaread dedtaayaevee a 108 HOLD PUNCO coegi camin wha tana ee ended 108 Using the Unit s Remote Control to Operat
184. erminals at the front e If DV cable is connected the S Video and Audio Video cable are not required Recording from a VCR etc Preparation e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the HDD drive NTSC change the TV System to NTSC in the Setup menu gt 104 e When the output signal from the external device is Ok Eh a few times to select the input where your external device is connected then Ch C Select AV3 for connection with S Video or Audio Video cable Select DV for connection with DV cable REC NODE 2 a few times to select the recording mode DR HG HX HE HL FR mode cannot be selected 3 Start play on the external device REC O ei at the point you want to start recording Tips To skip unwanted parts Press II to pause recording Press again to restart recording To stop recording Press W The confirmation screen appears Press OK Notes e When timer recording starts while recording from an external device timer recording takes priority Recording from the external device stops When a timer recording from an external device starts When another timer recording using this unit s tuner starts e If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit then the video quality will be degraded e Almost all videos and DVD Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying Any software that has been so t
185. es e When recording or playing while copying this unit may not copy at the maximum speed e Depending on the condition of the disc this unit may not copy at the maximum speed Playable discs BD RE SL DL BD RE Ver 2 1 conforming JPEG BD R SL DL BD R LTH TYPE Ver 1 2 conforming BD R Ver 1 3 conforming BD Video DVD RAM DVD Video Recording format AVCHD format JPEG DVD R DVD Video format AVCHD format MP3 2 3 JPEG 3 DivX 2 3 DVD Video format AVCHD format MP3 2 3 JPEG DivX gt 3 DVD Video format DVD Video Recording format AVCHD format DVD R DL Dual Layer DVD RW R R DL Double Layer RW DVD Video CD Audio CD DA CD R CD RW CD DA MP3 2 3 JPEG DivX 8 Optical pick up System with 2 lens 3 integration units 405 nm wavelength for BDs 662 nm wavelength for DVDs 783 nm wavelength for CDs LASER specification Class 1 LASER Product Pickup Wave length CD 783 nm wave length DVD 662 nm wave length BD 405 nm wave length Laser power No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection RQT9430 Video Video system PAL colour signal 625 lines 50 fields NTSC colour signal 525 lines 60 fields Recording system MPEG2 Hybrid VBR MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Video in PAL NTSC AV1 AV2 21 pin AV3 AV4 pin jack 1 Vp p 75 Q termination S Video in PAL NTSC AV2 21 pin AV3 AV4 S terminal 1 Vp p 75 Q termination RGB in PAL AV2 21 p
186. es 1 DVD RAM Time Remaining 5 38EP Used 0 J R With a finalised discs the name is displayed on the Top Menu My favorite 01 02 01 oz Chapter 1 Chapter 2 G The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other equipment after creating top menu 4 RQT9430 Deleting All Titles Formatting Discs or Cards You can delete all titles on the disc at once RAM Important Once deleted contents cannot be recovered New disc only RAM aJ Perform preparation steps of Accessing the Formatting is the process of making media recordable on Management Menus gt 94 recording equipment O Press A V to select Delete all titles then press You can record or edit after formatting the finalised DVD RW OK Important Once formatted contents cannot be recovered Press lt to select Yes then press OK Perform preparation steps of Accessing the Press q to select Start then press OK Management Menus gt 94 A message appears when deleting is finished O Press A V to select Format Disc or Format Press OK to complete Card then press OK O Press lt q to select Yes then press OK Notes Press lt q to select Start then press OK e Still picture data JPEG music data or computer data Formatting starts GM may take up to a maximum cannot be deleted of 70 minutes e Deleting do
187. es not work if one or more titles are protected A message appears when formatting is finished Press OK to complete Notes e Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting This can render the disc unusable e When a disc has been formatted using this unit it may not be possible to use it on any other equipment R Formatting cannot be performed EaU You can format only as DVD Video format on this unit EJ The card cannot be formatted if the write protect switch gt 23 is switched to LOCK Release the protection to continue e The message Unable to format appears when trying to format discs the unit cannot use Tips To stop formatting FAW Press BACK RETURN 3 e You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes The disc must be reformatted if you do this a S a 9 s Functions RQT9430 Disc and Card Management Selecting the background style Top Menu Fal ET EG Ad ST The background selected here will be displayed as the DVD Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu EENM Perform preparation steps of Accessing the Management Menus gt 94 O Press A V to select Top Menu then press OK Press A V lt gt to select the background then press OK Display after finalising Thumbnail a Still picture T Title Name e You can change thumbna
188. es screen Two or more titles recorded in the Day Date or series timer recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item All Titles screen Displays all titles DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles SHDD Time Remaining 45 54 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC SHDD Time Remaining 45 54 DR VIDEO PTURE MUSIC a Tine A 4 B O 2505 12 36 Bom AndBred AWnathi 2 4A i O01 25 05 SAT 12 36 Bom And Bred AWrathful D a lowos Av2 1 35 1 D 0 002 25 05 SAT 512 37 Play Schoo Food Friday a i 01 08 AVI 4 13 1 003 01 06 SUN AV2 1 35 Rec time me m 004 o1s sun avi 1 13 0 00 0R 0 00 0R M Not viewed M Not viewed Iv w Page 01 01 Page 01 01 ok COPTION IT Select ok COPTION IT Select JORETURN J VIDEO Picture music orev mvo Picture music Select the item marked with then press OK to display the bundled titles Playback the title that was viewed once imb You can choose to start the playback from the point you have last stopped or from the beginning when the resume play function gt 26 is operating 1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed Press OPTION 2 Press A V to select Play then press OK Press lt gt to select Last Stopped or Beginning then press OK To sort the titles for easy searching
189. es were deleted after changing the date of folder Delete it if unrequired e If there is no folder with the changed date a new folder will be created Enter Album Name HDD u Ea Album View only You can give a name to the album gt 84 Entering Text e Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment Set up Protection Cancel Protection HDD Ram sD Album View and Picture JPEG View only If set this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion Press lt gt to select Yes then OK The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected e Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album the album may be deleted by another unit Delete Delete Album Delete Pictures HDD G0 SD Press lt gt to select Delete then OK e Once deleted the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored Make certain before proceeding EN EY If there is a file other than DCF format or other folder exists in the date or album only the pictures will be deleted and the date or the album itself will not be deleted Xx Multiple editing is possible Copy to Album Copy to New Album Change Date Only when the Picture JPEG View screen is displayed Notes e Timer recordings do not start when performing Copy to Album Copy to New Album Change Date Copy to Di
190. etting gt step Setting the unit to copy according to the set time 4 Press A V to select Copy Time then press gt 2 Press A V to select Time Setting then press OK Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc 3 Press A V to select Off then press OK Press lt d to confirm Copy will continue until there is not enough available recording space on the HDD Setting the copying time 3 Press A V to select On then press OK Press A W to select Copy Time then press OK Copy 4 Copy Direction cag qCopyTime Press lt gt to select Hour or Min then press A V to set the recording time Press OK T Press lt to confirm Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the content being played finishes Set a few minutes longer than the source title in order to include the operation time before play begins Press A V to select Start Copying then press OK Q Press lt j to select Yes then press OK to start copying The disc top menu is displayed Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when Title 1 is selected from the Auto Play Select menu when finalising the disc gt 96 Notes e The screen on the right is recorded at the beginning e The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of copy to the end e If play does not begin a
191. etwork terminals connecting at the same time Check the content of your contract CEE Other Page After performing an update you e Depending on the content of the update some settings may have returned to can no longer receive broadcasts the preset values Fix the settings again Cannot set On in BD Video 24p e Only when the unit is connected to the HDMI terminal of a TV supporting 24p Output you can select On In some cases where the unit is connected to a TV via an amplifier receiver through the HDMI terminals you may not be able to select On In this case connect the unit to a TV through the HDMI terminal and connect it to the amplifier receiver through any terminal other than HDMI Pause Live TV stops e Pause Live TV from AV1 AV2 AV3 or AV4 input stops when a timer recording from external input started Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons Abkhazian 6566 Chinese 9072 Hausa 7265 Lithuanian 7684 Rhaeto Romance Tamil 8465 Afar 6565 Corsican 6779 Hebrew 7387 Macedonian 7775 8277 Tatar 8484 Afrikaans 6570 Croatian 7282 Hindi 7273 Malagasy 7771 Romanian 8279 Telugu 8469 Albanian 8381 Czech 6783 Hungarian 7285 Malay 7783 Russian 8285 Thai 8472 Amharic 6577 Danish 6865 Icelandic 7383 Malayalam 7776 Samoan 8377 Tibetan 6679 Arabic 6582 Dutch 7876 Indonesian 7378 Maltese 7784 Sanskrit 8365 Tigrinya 8473 Armenian 7
192. ff is selected Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied Finalise or Create Top Menu A Fl ETS EG BG SY GS only 2 Press A V to select Finalise or Create Top Menu then press OK 3 Press A V to select On or Off then press OK e If On is selected After finalising the discs become play only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment However you can no longer record or edit Create the Top Menu Top Menu is a convenient function We recommend you create the menu before playing a RW disc on other equipment Audio Description Normal Speed Copy only 2 Press A V to select Audio Description then press OK 3 Press A V to select Automatic or Off then press OK e If Automatic is selected If title recorded in DR mode includes Audio Description the title will be copied with Audio Description e If Off is selected Title recorded in DR mode will be copied without Audio Description 4 Press lt to confirm Y to select Start Copying then lt P to select Yes then Tips To stop copying Press and hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds after step You cannot stop while finalising or creating the top menu To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To select the subtitle language to copy gt 99 Preferred Subtitles Regarding copy restriction on frees
193. g RQT9430 Advanced Timer Recording GDJ Series recording This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just one timer recording using the TV Guide system 4 SH a few times and select lt P freesat then The channel genre selection screen appears A V lt gt to select the desired genre then The TV Guide list appears fm Channel Genre Selection All Channels Regional Entertainment Favourites News amp Sport Movies Lifestyle Music Children Special Interest Shopping Gaming amp Dating om OA V lt gt to select the desired programme then WED 19 08 2009 13 30 WED 198th 12 00 20 00 BBC HD Preview Time 14 00 LEJ BBC HD Preview Tu Red Cap Red Cap L Love USA News Show N 100 Sheep Dream SITU Heartbeat amma UFo 24 hours a Pron A Y to select Series Timer Rec then If the same episode has already been set for series timer recording at a different time or on another channel Series Timer Rec will not be selectable You can select the HD programme for recording when there are both SD and HD programmes gt 29 Timer Recording Using the TV Guide freesat e 9g a WED 19 08 2009 12 42 60 19 DR aurea View 102 BBo TWO Wales O Dee C so 4 Prog Name Media Revolution InputNeme
194. g Dynamic Range Compression Change the dynamic range for late night viewing On Off Automatic Downmix Switch the downmix system for playing back multi channel surround sound e When Dolby D Dolby D Dolby TrueHD DTS DTS HD or MPEG is set to Bitstream there are no downmix effects for the audio output e The audio output will be in stereo in the following cases AVCHD playback Playback of clicking sound on the menu and audio with secondary video in picture in picture mode Stereo When connected to equipment that does not support the virtual surround function Surround encoded When connected to equipment that supports the virtual surround function Bilingual Audio Selection Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when e Recording to a DVD R DVD RW DVD Video format R and RW e Recording Format for DVD is set to Video format gt 101 e Recording sound in LPCM gt 103 Audio Mode for XP Recording M 1 M 2 e You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an external source such as when copying from a video cassette recorder except from DV equipment connected to this units DV input terminal Select the audio on the other equipment e When recording from the units DV terminal select the type of audio recording from Audio Mode for DV Input gt 103 Digital Audio Output Change the settings
195. g e Audio quality Music CD LPCM y R DAJ MP3 MP3 Coe eae e The maximum number of tracks on HDD 40000 E Depends on the remaining capacity lt gt to select Copy then If titles or pictures are recorded then the number of albums Recording starts XY that can be recorded will be reduced Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 in steps to O To stop copying Press and hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds in step Notes e While copying no other operations can be performed Timer recordings will not proceed e Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc USB memory or SD card 82 e CDs which have SCMS Serial Copy Management System NY restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD RQT9430 Deleting music Once deleted the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored Make certain before proceeding 1 While stopped E gt A V to select Delete then O G4 When MUSIC is not selected press the Yellow button to select MUSIC DELETE Navigator Music Menu Total Tracks 53 VIDEO rrome Music nll Frequently Played CQOPTION Please select to access music OK Gorm VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC Deleting an artist album music Press A V to select the item then press OK Press A V lt gt to select the
196. g method e From broadcasts e From Internet network connection and setting is required gt 109 115 Update of the software is done when it is in standby mode Once the new software is found it will start the download of the software and then update Download of the software will start automatically when the power of this unit is turned in standby or when it is 3 a m e The time it takes to update depends on the connection For Broadcast About 1 hour It may change depending on the condition of the broadcast For Internet About 1 hour It may take longer than specified above to download because the download time differs depending on the network environment It is recommended to be used in a broadband environment If you do not want to perform the software update during the standby mode set Software Update in Standby in the Setup menu to Off gt 107 If a software update is available a notification is displayed New software version has been found The software will be updated automatically after the unit is switched to standby Do not disconnect the AC mains lead e Update of the software will start when the power is turned off To start downloading Press OK To ignore the new software Press EXIT The uni s display during the update e SW DL Software is downloading Download will stop when the power is turned on or the timer recording starts e STA
197. hannels to search for the programme you want to watch To switch between Landscape view and Portrait view Press GUIDE gO TV Guide Portrait WED 1H 06 2008 22 00 All Types 114 1TV2 1 1151TV3 116 ITV3 1 117 ITV4 gt Jack Osbourne Celebrity Adrenaline Sex Love amp nSecrets Teleshopping Coronation Street Coronation Street Emmerdate Timer Recording S Series Recording Using the TV Guide list Landscape view Press A V to select a channel Portrait view Press lt gt to select a channel The TV Guide list appears for this channel To change channels The Montel Williams Shoe Page Up Page Down Om savat PontralvLandscape M Prog Type E Channel Genre Portrait view Tips When displays the empty TV Guide list DA WED 19 08 2009 13 00 m TV Guide Portrait C apes crannan 4 113ITV2 _ 114ITV2 1 115ITV3 116 ITV3 1 117 ITV4 gt 2 50 Jack Osbourne Celebrity Adrenaline Sex Love amp nSecrets The empty field Coronation Street Coronation Street Emmerdate The Montel Williams Shoe To view a programme list for another day e Jump ahead 24 hours Press the Green button to jump ahead by one day e Jump back 24 hours Press the Red button You can only jump back to the current date Past information cannot be viewed To change the page of the TV Guide list Press A
198. hat is easily susceptible to damage As a basic rule save important content to a disc as backup E The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration shock or dust Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be possible Especially during operation do not subject the unit to any vibration shock or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket In the event of a power failure during recording or play the content may be damaged E The HDD is a temporary storage device The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one off viewing editing or copying It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from Immediately save backup all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD If there is an irregularity within the HDD repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture block noise etc may result Using the HDD in this condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable As soon as you notice this type of problem copy all content to disc and request service Recorded content data on an HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable e When the unit is turned on or off there may be an unexpected sound This does not indicate a problem with this unit
199. he middle Press BACK RETURN 5 Characters will not be saved Notes Enter Title Name en Top Menu Preview If you enter a long name only part of it is shown in the Top Menu after finalisation gt 96 When entering a title name the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in Top Menu Preview window RQT9430 Enjoying VIERA CAST You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home screen with VIERA CAST for example YouTube Picasa Web Albums Current as of February 2009 e VIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection Dial up Internet connections cannot be used Preparation e Network connection gt 115 e Network setting gt 109 VIEFA Q Message is displayed Please read these instructions carefully and then press OK to start VIERA CAST function Welcome to Network Service Ms recommanded your playarirecorder i i HD dspiay wih HDMI The splay of the contents may be runcated depending on the Instructions found may reduce lo sareen size by folowing rating Instructions Images are for illustration purpose message may change without notice A V lt P to select the item 2 You can operate VIERA CAST using the following buttons on the unit s remote control A V lt gt OK BACK RETURN 5 OPTION coloured buttons and numbered but
200. he name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play or edit the data x1 XXXX KKK IPG JPEG DCIMx gt gt kK XXXXX XXXX KK SPG DCIM x gt KXXXXX XXXX JPG RQT9430 EJ xxx Numbers XXX Letters T KXXXXX Picture folder XXXX JPG Any folder with JPEG files e g 001 P0000001 JPG P0000002 JPG D viporo MPEG2 folder PRG gt MOV MOD MOV MOI PRG PGI MGR_INFO MPEG2 information folder RIVATE avcHp AVCHD folder Copyright etc Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Manufactured under license under U S Patent s 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 487 535 7 392 195 7 272 567 7 333 929 7 212 872 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued amp pending DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos Symbol DTS HD and DTS HD Master Audio Essential are trademarks of DTS Inc 1996 2008 DTS Inc All Rights Reserved This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use of this copyright protection tec
201. he recorded time title with same quality recording mode of the titles to be copied e Even if you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original the picture quality does not improve Are chapters maintained Or o Are thumbnails x2 maintained 2 2 Recording and Playing o a while Copying 1 Position of the chapter might shift slightly It will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers on a disc EGS EG GE Ed Ee GNM Approx 1000 Approx 254 Depends on the state of recording 2 Position of the thumbnails might shift slightly May not be maintained depending on the state of recording 3 Possible only with titles on the HDD However it is not possible when copying with finalisation creating top menu or when copying SD Video MPEG2 format or when copying HD Video AVCHD format You cannot perform chasing play or edit etc while copying Still pictures or music cannot be played Copying speed when copying from the HDD to BD R in High Speed Copy Approx HDD 6X Speed BD R DL 50 GB SL 25 GB Recording Mode Recorded programme p gt Required time Speed HL 1 hour 1 min 24s 43x Notes e The above rate in the list indicates the shortest time and fastest speed required for copying one hour title from HDD to the disc by High Speed copying e The required amount of time and speed may vary depending on the cond
202. he unit This can cause electric shock or malfunction Do not let liquids get into the unit This can cause electric shock or malfunction If this occurs immediately disconnect the unit from the power supply and contact your dealer Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit They contain flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit Service Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself If sound is interrupted indicators fail to light smoke appears or any other problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs disconnect the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service centre Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is repaired disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power source if it is not to be used for a long time This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile telephones during use If such interference is apparent please increase separation between the product and the mobile telephone The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and easily accessible The mains plug of the
203. he unit or subject to vibration or impact The HDD may become damaged e Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket or flip the power breaker switch While the unit is on the HDD is rotating at high speed Sound or movement due to rotation is normal E When moving the unit Turn the unit off Wait until BYE disappears from the display Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop approx 2 minutes in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock Even after turning the unit off the HDD continues operating for a short time E Indemnity concerning recorded content Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or edited content data and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly Likewise the above also applies in a case where any type of repair is made to the unit including any other non HDD related component RQT9430 Remote Control Information Unit Care Remote Control Information About batteries e Insert so the poles and match those in the remote control R6 LR6 AA e Use alkaline or manganese batteries e Do not mix old and new batteries e Do not use different types at the same time e Do not heat or expose to flame e Do not leave the batteries in a
204. hese can be output in 24p as the original Therefore high quality video can be enjoyed such as the improved clarity enhanced perspective etc Preparation e Connect to a TV supporting 1080 24p input via an HDMI cable e Set BD Video 24p Output to On in the Setup menu gt 105 50 J RQT9430 Playing DivX Playing DivX video contents R USB DivX is a digital video format created by DivX Inc This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto DVD R DVD R DL CD R CD RW and USB memory Insert a disc or USB memory Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each media A Eee ee a e g fea OOOO oO Play Video DivX Play Pictures JPEG Play Copy Music MP3 CD is inserted e It will go to step automatically if it is only Divx that is recorded Play Video DivX Copy Video AVCHD Copy Video MPEG2 Play Pictures JPEG Copy Pictures JPEG Play Copy Music MP3 USB device is m RETURN A Y to select Play Video Divx then e g DivX Menu CD 0X 8 1 _ABC divx e Select a folder from OPTION menu Page 01 01 e Files are treated as titles A Y to select the title then on Gj Play starts on the selected title Tips
205. hnology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited e SDHC logo is a trademark e Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and are provided under license by ARIS SOLANA 4C HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC 1 patent portfolio license for the personal and non commercial use of a consumer to i encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC 1 Standard AVC VC 1 Video and or ii decode AVC VC 1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity and or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC VC 1 Video No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA LLC See http Awww mpegla com AVCHD and the AVCHD logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation HDAVI Control is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation Blu ray Disc is trademark VIERA CAST is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation BD LIVE logo is trademark of Blu ray Disc Association BONUSVIEW is trademark of Blu ray Disc Association
206. hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds Notes The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same at the copy destination Copying new still pictures on the SD card Copy New Pictures a GE This unit saves information about imported still pictures Therefore if still pictures are imported from the same SD card then only new still pictures will be imported 0 While stopped Insert the SD card The menu is automatically displayed e If the menu is not displayed gt 70 SD Card O oooO Copy Video AVCHD Copy Video MPEG2 Play Pictures JPEG Play Copy Music MP3 SD card is inserted ok RETURN Copy New Pictures JPEG Copy from SD CARD Copy to Hoo Copy added pictures JPEG by date Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the SD card 2 Press A V to select Copy Pictures JPEG then OK Press lt gt to select Copy then OK Protection of the card is e Set Copy will start e Not set Go to step 2 O Press lt gt to select Copy amp Delete or Copy Only then OK If Copy amp Delete is selected Copied pictures in the SD card will be deleted after copying If Copy Only is selected Pictures will not be deleted m will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the Direct Navigator for the added pictures Tips To stop co
207. i aean canto de day pa be Gr e a A 47 Display the subtitle during play 000 47 Playback of the High Definition Video AVCHD and PlayliStS sic ee aed ee ewe a eee 48 Playback of the High Definition Video AVCHD 48 Playback of the playlists created on other equipment 48 To enjoy the BD Video which supports BONUSVIEW OF BD Live 2022s twee cee w seca eG eee ee oe ee en 49 Playing secondary video picture in picture and secondary audi si eaywsciegeedanernaliee daa gk end 49 Enjoying BD Live discs with Internet 00 49 To enjoy High Bit rate Audio and Video 50 Enjoying High Bit rate Audio with 7 1ch speaker 50 Regarding 24p output ccc erer ee eens 50 Playing D VX iu cic ieee eee ee ee eee 51 Playing DivX video contents 000000 e itaw 51 Titles Editing 0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 53 Accessing the Title View 0 cee cece eee eee eee 53 Tithe Operations sesno surea met Sea ea eS 53 Create Playback Edit of the Chapter 56 Create Chapter Mark 1 0 0 0 cece eee eee 56 Editing and playing chapters 00 0000000 56 Chapter operations s 00 se deeeekede Pees ne EARE as 56 Copying Copying Titles sssrin emia rawana eee eee eis 57 Copy direction ri aranku gui naatasan ee abe ge on 57 Copy Speed oes veda nasa danse E a E eee Goa eon ay 58 Copying speed when copying from the HDD to BD
208. ic s video camera etc Refer to the camera s operating instructions for detail Display items differ Copy Video AVCHD Copy Video MPEG2 depending on what Play Pictures JPEG x is recorded in the USB device Copy Pictures JPEG Play Copy Music MP3 USB device is inserted oK ORETURN A V to select Copy Video AVCHD then Y to select Copy to HDD or Copy to Blu ray Disc then CJ A Y to select the title then PAUSE ii A A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary titles e Press If again to cancel All the recordings on the same date become a title Oe 4 P to select Start then lt 7 Notes e Record playback or timer recording cannot be executed while copying e Copy cannot be executed while recording or playback e An AVCHD title with more than 100 scenes will be divided into titles every 99th scene and copied e Copied video will be displayed as AVCHD in the Channel column of the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen e Depending on the recording condition with the high definition camera scenes recorded on same day might have different titles 1 2 appended to date e See the instructions of the equipment used to record Copying SD Video MPEG2 format recorded on the Panasonic s video camera etc to the From a video equipment
209. ide a title when the resulting parts are too short EI Divided titles form a group of titles Change Thumbnail mm a a EG A As El It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after finalising It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after creating Top Menu EP Settings for Change Thumbnail is saved when high speed copy is performed to DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R R DL or RW Perform steps of Accessing the Title View gt 53 O Press A V to select Change Thumbnail then press OK Enter Title Name DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail SHDD Time Remaining 20 08 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC Set up Protection 008 Cancel Protection S E Partial Delete Aa HAAN Divide Title Change Thumbnail He Es DR File Conversion 6 6 Press gt PLAY and Ill to set the point you want to use as the thumbnail Q Press A V to select Change then press OK For quicker editing gt below Tips To change the thumbnail Perform steps again O Press A V to select Finish then press OK Tips For quicker editing e Use Search gt 46 or Time Slip gt 47 to find the desired point e To skip to the start or end of a title press kgd start or gt gt end e For better precision us
210. ied from disc SD card or USB gt 68 Copy direction Copy speed Copy source Copy destination Possible copying method e The high speed copy may not be R RAM R f possible depending on the R DL c Titte Playing destination disc or the title to copy Py gt 59 When is high speed copy not possible w i D m D w z o SID 3 i r J Copy Normal speed ius m JD Copy High speed J lt D Normal speed Copy RW Before finalise Ea Al E JD i I Cannot copy b PEJS mo eg DVD V After finalise Copy Normal speed Editing yl ee ada D g SD Video MPEG2 format Cry Copy High speed e From an SD card or RAM Panasonic s video camera etc rom USB BD RE EAA E DL Cannot copy HD Video AVCHD format Copy AVCHD High speed e From discs HDD HDD Copy AVCHD High speed HD Video AVCHD format e From an SD card or Panasonic s video camera etc from USB Almost all DVD Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying Any software that has been so treated cannot be recorded using this unit Cannot copy EJ D o E D lt 57 RQT9430 Copying Titles Copy speed O Possible Impossible High speed mode Normal speed mode Features Copy with shorter time than the recorded time of the It will take same or longer time as t
211. ied one will be indicated with the icon 0 You cannot copy from them in high definition quality DR HG HX HE HL any more e Copying and converting recording mode with DR File Conversion to XP SP LP EP FR mode are not restricted e Regardless of the copy restriction status the picture output of freesat programmes in HD quality from COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal is converted to SD quality 576i p when watching the broadcast or playing back after recorded RQT9430 Recording A I EEO Important Notes for Recording 16 9 image such as wide broadcasting e When Recording Format for DVD gt 101 in the Setup menu is Video format Record from external equipment Copy from the finalised disc DVD Video to the HDD e When copying to Eid e When copying to in HG HX HE HL modes e When converting the recording mode from DR mode to HG HX HE HL XP SP LP EP FR modes It will be recorded in accordance to the setting of Aspect for Recording gt 101 in the Setup menu e In the following cases even when set to Automatic or 16 9 recordings will be made or copied in 4 3 E E When the recording mode is set to EP or FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode When copying to R R DL and RW DR File Conversion DR File Conversion is a function that converts the titles in DR mode to other recording modes In general Data size of a title will be
212. igh speed recording Even if the disc is even in high speed mode high speed recording compatible the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc e It takes longer than normal to copy many titles e You cannot high speed copy to DVD R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP 8 hours mode recording An unusually loud sound is coming e When high speed copying to a disc the sound of the disc rotating may be from the rotating disc louder than normal however this is not a problem e If you want copy to perform more quietly select Normal Silent in BD DVD 101 Speed for High Speed Copy in the Setup menu Cannot record from the external e The external device is not correctly connected 65 device e The proper external input channel AV1 AV2 AV3 AV4 or DV is not selected Press INPUT SELECT to change e Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected The DV Automatic Recording e If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted check the 65 function does not work connections and the DV equipment settings e You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television e Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive e Depending on the equipment the DV Automatic Recording may not operate properly e You can only rec
213. ill copy at normal speed in following cases e Copying XP SP LP EP or FR mode title to e Copying to Bw El in following conditions Titles in DR HG HX HE HL mode Title of the AVCHD copied to the HDD e Copying to Ea in following conditions Copy including a title that was recorded to HDD with Recording Format for DVD set to VR format Titles that contain many deleted segments Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic s video camera etc with HDD SD Video gt 69 Pid Titles recorded in EP mode and FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode Paid Titles recorded in 16 9 aspect R EDA EA Titles recorded in 16 9 aspect using EP mode or FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode e Setting Recording Mode to anything but High Speed e Copying from BD RE BD R RW to HDD e El When copying from the finalised disc to HDD When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible discs The sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal If you want copy to perform more quietly select Normal Silent in BD DVD Speed for High Speed Copy in the Setup menu gt 101 Ei When copying to disc in normal speed mode When not copying in high speed mode titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to the disc The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then de
214. ils displayed in the top menu gt 54 Change Thumbnail Selecting Whether to Show the Top Menu First Auto Play Select Fal Ee EG Ad ST Before finalising a disc or creating top menu select whether the top menu shows after finalising or creating top menu Perform preparation steps of Accessing the Management Menus gt 94 Press A V to select Auto Play Select then press OK O Press A V to select Top Menu or Title 1 then press OK e Top Menu The Top Menu appears first e Title 1 The disc content is played without displaying the Top Menu Finalising R You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by finalising it on the unit effectively making it into DVD Video that complies with DVD Video standards Before finalising select the background on the Top Menu gt above The menu you create with the unit can also be used on most DVD players e Finalising BD R prevents accidental recording or editing e BD R that was recorded on this unit may not be played on other Blu ray players etc whether or not you finalise it Perform preparation steps of Accessing the Management Menus gt 94 O Press A V to select Finalise then press OK Press lt q to select Yes then press OK Press lt q to select Start then press OK Finalising starts and cannot be cancelled may take up to 15 minutes up to 6
215. in 0 7 Vp p 75 Q termination Video out PAL NTSC AV1 AV2 21 pin Video Out pin jack 1 Vp p 75 Q termination S Video out PAL NTSC AV1 21 pin S Video Out S terminal 1 Vp p 75 Q termination RGB out PAL NTSC AV1 21 pin 0 7 Vp p PAL 75 Q termination Component video output PAL 576i 576p 720p 1080i NTSC 480i 480p 720p 1 080i Y 1 0 Vp p 75 Q termination Pp 0 7 Vp p 75 Q termination Pr 0 7 Vp p 75 Q termination Audio Recording system Dolby Digital XP SP LP EP mode 2ch Linear PCM XP mode Dolby Digital DR mode freesat HG HX HE HL mode Max 5 1ch Dolby Digital Plus DR mode freesat Max 5 1ch MPEG DR mode 2ch Audio in AV1 AV2 21 pin AV3 AV4 pin jack Input level Standard 0 5 Vrms Full scale 2 0 Vrms at 1 kHz Input impedance More than 10 kQ Audio out AV1 AV2 21 pin Audio Out pin jack Output level Standard 0 5 Vrms Full scale 2 0 Vrms at 1 kHz Output impedance Less than 1 KQ Digital audio out Optical terminal PCM Dolby Digital DTS MPEG Coaxial terminal PCM Dolby Digital DTS MPEG HDMI terminal PCM Dolby Digital DTS MPEG Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD High Resolution Audio HDMI Output 19 pin type A 1 pc HDMI V 1 3a with Deep Colour x v Colour High Bit rate Audio e This unit supports HDAVI Control 4 function OEE 500 GB 250 GB Internal HDD capacity DV input IEEE 1394 Standard 4 pin 1 pc
216. in DR recording mode Programmes can be saved temporary up to 8 hours on the HDD This may vary depending on the HDD free space Operation during Pause Live TV Search Press lt lt 4 gt gt The speed increases up to 5 steps e Press gt PLAY to restart play Pause Press II e Press gt PLAY to restart Quick View Press and hold p gt PLAY x1 3 e Press again to return to the normal speed Slow motion While paused press lt lt or gt gt The speed increases up to 5 steps e Press gt PLAY to restart play Stop Pause Live 1 Press W TV 2 Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Notes e Temporary save is stopped in following cases When save time exceeds 8 hours When there is no HDD free space When 2 programmes are recorded simultaneously e The Pause Live TV function does not work The clock is not set While 2 programmes simultaneous recording While watching a programme being recorded When DV is selected e When paused for approximately 5 minutes the screen saver is displayed only when Screen Saver in the Setup menu is set to On gt 104 To return to the previous screen press BACK RETURN 5 pe a S a e S RQT9430 Functions Disc and Card Management You can manage discs through formatting finalising and other operations Accessing the Management Menus Preparation E B
217. inals such as this unit or computers or an additional fee might be required e Use only category 5 straight LAN cables STP when connecting to peripheral devices e When operating the VIERA CAST use high speed Internet service no less than 1 5 Mbps for SD Standard Definition and 6 Mbps for HD High Definition picture quality by your local broadband company If using slow Internet connection the video may not be displayed correctly e Inserting any cable other than a LAN cable in the LAN terminal can damage the unit 115 Reference RQT9430 Operations that can be performed simultaneously Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title O Possible Impossible Playback of HDD Playback of discs Playback of BD Video Playback of still pictures Playback of music recorded While recording to HDD in DR mode on HDD While recording from external equipment to HDD in XP SP LP EP and FR mode While recording from DV input While copying in normal speed mode While copying in high speed mode With finalising or creating Top Menu RW J While copying in high speed mode O Without finalising or creating Top Menu EG x It cannot playback e Simultaneous operation is not possible while executing DV Automatic Recording or Recording via AV3 input Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
218. ing NTSC are played as PAL60 Select to record television programmes and PAL input from other equipment py Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the HDD NTSC Select when connecting to an NTSC television Television programmes cannot be recorded properly Select to record NTSC input from other equipment ER Select when playing an NTSC input title recorded on the HDD Tips To change the setting without using the menu PAL lt gt NTSC While stopped press and hold Il and A OPEN CLOSE on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds Notes e This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings However both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD BD RE or BD R e If NTSC has been selected the TV Guide system cannot be used e If the current TV System setting does not match the TV System of a disc or a title recorded on the HDD the title cannot be played the disc cannot be played during recording timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby Change the TV System to play the disc or the title Also note that the TV System setting should be changed back to the previous setting after the playback HDMI Connection e Press OK to show the following settings HDMI Video Mode Select On when video is output from HDMI AV OUT terminal On Off When the equipment such as am
219. is not being received correctly digital satellite channel information is also recorded and will remain visible during playback Selecting Multi Audio When Multi Audio appears in digital satellite channel information OPTION GD eS show the OPTION menu Y to select Multi Audio AD then Multi Audio AD panel appears 4 P to select the desired audio EXIT then Os Listening to the Audio Description This function can aid visually impaired viewers by adding an audio track to describe events on screen When AD appears in digital satellite channel information OPTION e show the OPTION menu A Y to select Multi Audio AD then Multi Audio AD panel appears 4 gt to select AD EXIT then Os Notes e Programmes are recorded with Audio Description when you record them with set to AD Tips To turn off the Audio Description In the step above press lt gt to select other than AD then press EXIT Showing the Digital TEXT MHEG Showing Subtitles When TXT appears in digital satellite channel information TEXT to show the Digital TEXT Press again to hide Notes e During recording the Digital TEXT function is not possible e The Digital TEXT function depends on respective stations e When subtitle is on or the digital satellite channel information is displayed the
220. is operation will only record to HDD in DR mode If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every week using timer recording the unit will record the new programme over the old one This function can be used only when daily weekly or series timer recording is selected 4 PROGICHECK A Y to select the programme then 4 P to select Renew column 4 V to select ON then Weekly z wes 300 EO on 4 Prog Name BBC News at One BBS 1 Cl Notes e f a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or while playback is taking place from the HDD or while copying the programme will not be overwritten Instead the programme set for recording will be saved as a separate programme and this programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto Renewal Recording takes place e When there is not enough space on the HDD the programme may not be recorded completely If the Overlapped Timer Recording screen appears If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other timer recordings using the TV Guide system the Overlapped Timer Recording screen appears to help you eliminate the overlapping Follow the on screen instructions Check Change Delete Programmes or Resolve Overlapping The timer recording list can be viewed even when the unit is off Q a Drive OK PROGICHECK then A to select th
221. is turned on RGB 2 without component Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only when playback or viewing menus select this mode e If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable and HDMI Video Mode is set to On you cannot select RGB 1 without component or RGB 2 without component AV2 Settings Set to match the connected equipment e Press OK to show the following settings AV2 Input Set to RGB Video or RGB when receiving or recording RGB output from external equipment RGB Video The unit automatically detects whether the input signal from the AV2 terminal is an RGB signal or other signals and makes settings RGB Video S Video Ext Link This setting cannot be made when the TV System is set to NTSC gt 104 Ext Link 1 When this unit is connected to a satellite or cable receiver with a 21 pin Scart cable and this unit receives a control signal Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by the control signal Ext Link 2 When external equipment with a timer function is connected Recording is continued while the image signal is being sent to the unit from the external equipment Recording is stopped when the image signal is halted by turning the external equipment off On Off If you connect a DVI device that is not compatible wi
222. it Programme gt 28 Series Timer Recording gt 28 Deen to delete You cannot delete programmes that are currently being recorded OKs to modify the programme A V lt gt to make changes then When a programme with is selected then follow the on screen Green instructions to resolve overlapping If the on screen instructions do not appear change or delete the overlapped programme 41 z Recording RQT9430 Advanced Timer Recording GDJ Tips e You can enter up to 32 programmes a month in advance Each daily weekly or series timer recording is counted as one programme To exit the timer recording list Press PROG CHECK Notes e Recording may fail if there are changes to the station s programming e D disappears from the unit s display when no timer programme is set or when all timer programmes are deactivated aaao is displayed on a series recording item if there will be no episode of the series for the next 8 days We recommend you delete the item after you confirm the last episode of the series is recorded e The Guide Link function may not work if you manually change the start end time by over 10 minutes e The Guide Link function may not work if you manually change the start time later or the stop time earlier than the original time e Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer recording list at 4 a
223. it up on a ship or other place where DC is used AC mains lead protection WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE e DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN MOISTURE DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS SUCH AS VASES SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS e USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES e DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER OR BACK THERE ARE NO Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not damaged Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or electric shock Do not pull bend or place heavy items on the lead Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead Pulling the AC mains lead can cause electric shock Do not handle the plug with wet hands This can cause electric shock USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL CAUTION e DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE BUILT IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED TO PREVENT RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO OVERHEATING ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS e DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT S VENTILATION OPENINGS WITH NEWSPAPERS TABLECLOTHS CURTAINS AND SIMILAR ITEMS e DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES SUCH AS LIGHTED CANDLES ON THE UNIT e DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY MANNER Foreign matter Do not let metal objects fall inside t
224. ith black bar erased with Zoom Press FUNCTION MENU Switch the aspect ratio of the screen OCs When black bars are shown at the top bottom left and right sides of the screen you can enlarge the image to i reen tt a e The screen mode is switched to Normal in the following situations OPTION when you change channel 4 when you start or end the playback of a title when the unit is turned in standby or on A Y to select Aspect then Notes Side cut does not have any effect e When TV Aspect gt 104 is set to 4 3 or Letterbox the Zoom effect is disabled Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen Press EXIT 92 A RQT9430 To pause the TV programme you are watching Pause Live TV You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit s tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand If you stop the Pause Live TV function then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit Turn on this unit and select the channel When you want to pause the TV programme O When you want to resume PLAY x1 3 gt TY The programme is saved on the HDD
225. itions such as the area where information is written or unique feature on the disc Copy restrictions Some programmes on freesat channels are copy restricted and the number of times you can copy in DR HG HX HE HL mode is assigned by the broadcaster 0 Titles with the HD No Copy restriction You cannot select High Speed HG HX HE HL mode when copying to BD RE or BD R T Titles with the HD Copy Once restriction After copying in High Speed HG HX HE HL to BD RE or BD R the original title and the copied one will be indicated with the icon oc You cannot copy from them in high definition quality DR HG HX HE HL any more Copying list icons and functions Depending on the icon you may be informed about the on screen display D4 Titles that cannot be copied in high speed mode Title contains still picture s e Still picture s cannot be copied Titles that can be copied in HD quality once Title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on DD Titles that cannot be copied in HD quality anymore NTSC the unit PAL T i Titles with guidance information gt 34 Parental os these marks cannot be Control or titles recorded from channels with child lock gt 99 Child Lock You have to enter your PIN when you select these titles 58 RQT9430 Frequently Asked Questions When is high speed copy not possible It w
226. ity in which video is recorded High definition HD quality Standard definition SD quality DR HG HX HE HL XP SP LP EP FR Rewritable O Recording mode in which video is recorded Timer recording O Recording HD Copy Once programmes gt 33 O Recording HD No Copy programmes gt 33 O Disc type BD RE BD R 50 GB 25 GB 50 GB 25 GB e gt Blu ray Disc Blu ray Disc Standard symbol Data that can be recorded and played Video Still picture Video Quality in which video is recorded High definition HD quality Standard definition SD quality Recording mode in which video is recorded DR HG HX HE HL XP SP LP EP FR Rewritable O Timer recording Copying HD Copy Once titles gt 33 O Copy in high definition quality DR HG HX HE HL is possible only once Copying HD No Copy titles gt 33 O Copy in standard definition quality XP SP LP EP FR mode is possible Play on other players It can be played on the players compatible to BD RE Ver 2 1 and BD R e BD RE and BD R that were recorded on this unit may not be played on other Blu ray players etc e Playback of LTH type BD R discs may not be possible with players that do not support the LTH type format e Single side dual layer 50 GB disc can only be played on the compatible player e DL is also included DL is a single side dual layer disc e LTH type is als
227. k Setting ratings When level 8 is selected 8 No Limit All DVD Video can be played 1 to 7 Prohibits play of DVD Video with corresponding ratings recorded on them 0 Lock All Prohibits play of all DVD Video e Changing settings When level 0 to 7 is selected Unlock Recorder Change Level Temporary Unlock Parental Control You can restrict playback of the recorded titles that may include contents for adult Follow the on screen instructions Enter a 4 digit PIN with the numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown It will be the common PIN for DVD Video Ratings BD Video Ratings Child Lock Parental Control and Network Lock On Titles recorded from programmes that were broadcasted with guidance information in the night 21 00 05 30 will be indicated with the icon in DIRECT NAVIGATOR DELETE Navigator and copy source selection screen You will have to enter the PIN when playing back these titles Off Notes Choose the language for audio subtitles and disc menus If a language which is not recorded is selected or if languages are already fixed on the disc the language set as the default on the disc will be played instead Original The original language of each disc will be selected Other gt This is the language code setting Input a code number with the numbered buttons gt 132 Language code list Automatic If the language selecte
228. k Press OK to show the following settings Auto Clock Setting This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital broadcasts But if the time is not set correctly set it to Off and perform the Manual Setting gt below On Off Time Zone Adjust the time data Automatic The time data will be adjusted according to your area automatically GMT 6 to 6 The time data will be corrected on GMT Manual Setting gt 15 Owner ID gt 13 In order to prevent another person from using this unit if it is stolen you can set a PIN and input your personal information Once the PIN has been set you cannot return to the factory preset Make sure not to forget this e You can enter the PIN gt 13 to change the following personal information PIN NAME HOUSE NO POSTCODE PIN Entry gt 14 Power Save On Off Refer to the following when Power Save is set to On e Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned off gt 14 step e Startup of the unit becomes slower compared to when Power Save is Off System Update In order to update this unit s software and to support system changes made by broadcasts this unit periodically performs software updates e Press OK to show the following settings Software Update in Standby On You can perform the unit updates automatically when the unit is turned in
229. lashes CG When the unit cannot record a timer recording programme disc tray 2 The unit s display eer e SS Pull to the front Se panel oe oe H opo tt Standby on switch O I 0 0 eee 213 Disc tray open close button 0 cceeee gt 26 Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode DV IN terminal or vice versa In standby mode the unit is still for a digital video camcorder 008 gt 65 consuming a small amount of power SD card Slotsruin ian gt 117 Blue LED once cecceeeecseecesseeeestesenneeeenes gt 104 WSB Port iur e i gt 117 It is possible to set the LED to turn on off Channel select button eeeeee gt 24 27 Recording indicator REC1 REC2 Start recording Dutton cece gt 27 Red indicator light during recording Stop DUHOM sirsiran eeeeeteeettees gt 26 27 REC1 REC2 shows the status of one or twin Play X1 3 button ssssssesesssesneneeeneneerneneeeneneee gt 26 recording AV3 input terminals 0 cece gt 65 REC indication flash during Recording Pause e g when starting Guide LINK recording D 0 9090 0o 000 BO Q Serial number COMPONENT VIDEO OUT PROGRESSIVE AC IN Power supply INTERLACE terminals e gt 113 Connection for the AC mains lead Y Luminance signal brightness Ps Chrominance signal Cooling f
230. lect PICTURE HDD RAM To switch the display method Press OPTION Press A W to select Album View or Pictures by Date then press OK DIRECT NAVIGATOR Pictures by Date egs HDD SHDD Time Remaining 20 08 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC a Pictures by Date screen Sn hs Press OK to display pictures Page 01 01 azok OPTION IT select E rean voeo Picture music P Slideshow Editing an album or date Select the album or date to be edited then 7 Editing a still picture Select the album or date which contains the still picture to edit then press OK DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture JPEG View e 9 HDD SHDD Time Remaining 20 08 DR_ VIDEO PCTURE MUSIC 04 02 2009 i et Gey oa 008 Page 001 001 GZK OOPTON 11 Select S ORETUAN P Slideshow Select the still pictures to edit then press OPTION To show other pages Press kd lt gt gt Multiple editing Select with A V lt gt then press II Repeat A check mark appears Press If again to cancel RQT9430 A Y to select the operation then e g HEB Pictures by Date Album View Useful functions during still picture Slideshow Settings play gt 71 Copy to Album Change Date CoP 0 New Abu S oy tos VIDEO
231. leted You cannot copy to the disc in the following cases When there is not enough free space on the HDD When copying to a new blank disc if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be copied to the disc is greater than 499 in total When stopping the copy during copy When High speed copying All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied When Normal Speed copying Copies until the point cancelled R If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily copying to the HDD then nothing will be copied However if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to disc from the HDD then only titles completely copied at the point cancelled are copied Even if the title was not copied to the BD R DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD Video format R R DL or RW the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less Is it possible to copy to the disc SD card or USB memory after copying HD video AVCHD format to the HDD e It can be copied to the disc It can be copied with HD quality GA EA It will be copied with SD quality It cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality e It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory MPEG 2 or AVCHD files are not recognised Regarding titles recorded in DR mode from radio
232. lt gt to select On or Off Preferred Subtitles You can choose the subtitle language for digital broadcast If the selected language is not available then the original language will be selected 1 Press A V to select Preferred Subtitles then press OK 2 Press lt gt to select the language from the followings English Welsh Gaelic English for hearing impaired Welsh for hearing impaired Gaelic for hearing impaired Convenient Functions RQT9430 HDD Disc Settings ry gt Others gt Setup 7 gt 97 Accessing the Setup Menu All factory default settings are indicated with Underlined text HDD Disc A V select HDD Disc gt OS 2 HDD Disc Settings for Playback Settings for Recording HDD Management OK Gorn Settings for Playback Press OK to show the following settings Soundtrack English German French Italian Spanish Original Other gt Subtitles Automatic English German French Italian Spanish Other gt lt Menu English German French Italian Spanish Other lt x Play Video AVCHD on BD RE BD R Set when you are playing a disc that has high definition video AVCHD recorded by the camcorder and high definition quality title that was recorded on this unit e It can be played regardless of the setting for discs that do not have both
233. m two days later To deactivate timer programme e g to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming After performing step gt Previous page OT on the timer recording list turns gray Press the Red button again to activate timer programme RQT9430 Notes on timer recording e Timer recording will not be performed if the clock is not set e During recording timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby this unit cannot play discs or titles that do not match the TV System setting It is recommended TV System be set to match the discs or title before playing them But to prevent the failure of the timer recording change back the settings before the recording starts gt 104 e Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is turned on in standby e Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when playing e Timer recordings do not begin while copying in normal speed mode e If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins it remains turned on after recording finishes It does not turn off automatically You can turn the unit off during timer recording e When you programme successive timer recordings to start immediately one after the other the unit cannot record the part at the beginning of the later programmes Programme Programme gt z lt Not recorded Recorded Recorded e The Overlapped Timer Recording
234. maintains a relatively small file size DNS Server A server which acts like a telephone directory and translates Internet domain names into IP addresses Dolby Digital This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby Laboratories Apart from stereo 2 channel audio these signals can also be multi channel audio Dolby Digital Plus Multi channel audio and higher audio quality is made possible using Dolby Digital Plus BD Video supports up to 7 1 channel output Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is a very high quality audio format that reproduces the studio master audio BD Video supports up to 7 1 channel output Down mixing This is the process of remixing the multi channel audio found on some discs into fewer channels Drive In the instance of this unit this refers to the hard disk HDD disc BD and SD card SD These perform the reading and writing of data DTS Digital Theater Systems This surround system is used in many movie theaters There is good separation between the channels so realistic sound effects are possible DTS HD DTS HD is a high quality sophisticated audio format used in movie theaters Previous DTS Digital Surround compatible equipment can play DTS HD as DTS Digital Surround audio BD Video supports up to 7 1 channel output Dynamic range Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest level of sound befor
235. ment The title is recorded to the size of anew DVD 4 7GB connected to the AV3 input terminals by automatically selecting optimal quality betwen XP Recording mode is FR mode and EP 8 hours Preparation Preparation e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the BD drive e When the output signal from the external Select BD for any discs equipment is NTSC change TV System to e When the output signal from the external NTSC in the Setup menu gt 104 equipment is NTSC change TV System to NTSC in the Setup menu gt 104 4 With the unit stopped Q With the unit stopped we V to select Others then 2 A V to select Others then 3 A to select Flexible Recording via AV Input then ja A Y to select Recording via It may take a while for the next screen to 33 AV3 Input then XS display while preparing to record It may take a while for the next screen to Flexible Recording via AV input A Record in FR mode display while preparing to record ar eD Recording via AV3 input 2 Set recording time Please set recording time Record in FR mode x 8 Hour 00 Min Start Cancel Maximum recording time Set recording time 8 hour 00 min 8 Hour 00 Min Start Cancel RETURN lt gt to select Hour and Min and A F to set the recording time You can also set the recording time
236. mode play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD RAM Use 6 hours mode if playback may be on other equipment E233 EGG The recording time may be longer than the values indicated above if you copy the titles recorded from radio service e Due to peculiarities of BD RE and BD R you may be unable to copy to them even if disc space is remained E Regarding recording time remaining DR mode recording Remaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of approx 14 Mbps But the bit rate differs depending on the broadcast so the displayed remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time Other recording modes title conversion or from external input This unit records using a VBR Variable bit rate data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording If the remaining amount of time is insufficient delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording 2 programmes simultaneous recording It is possible to record 2 programmes simultaneously if both DISH IN 1 and DISH IN 2 terminals are connected to the satellite dish gt 10 Basic Connection Possible combination for 2 programmes simultaneous recording Digital broadcast Digital broadcast igital broadcas DR mode To record both programmes DR mode d eee neal to the HDD HDD HDD
237. more faithful reproduction of the original sound Signal quality This is the guide for checking the satellite dish direction The numbered values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal but the quality of the signal the signal to noise ratio or S N The channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions seasons time day night region length of the cable that is connected to the satellite dish etc Subnet mask Enables efficient network use A set of numbers which identify which part of the IP address allocated to every device connected to the router is the network portion Thumbnail This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display multiple pictures in the form of a list VIERA CAST An information service unique to Panasonic where specific Web sites can be viewed on this unit by connecting to the Internet without using a PC x v Colour x v Colour is a name for devices that are compatible with the xvYCC format an international standard for expanded colour in motion pictures and that follow the rules for signal transmission You can enjoy vivid colours of wider colour ranges for a more realistic picture when connected to a TV that supports the x v Colour with HDMI cable 1080i In one high definition image 1080 1125 alternating scan lines pass every 1 50th of a second to create an interlace image Because 1080i 1125i more than doubles current television broad
238. mory or an SD card will not be recognised TV Guide Page Is it possible to programme a e You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer 41 42 recording with a start and end Recording menu time that are different from the TV But if timings are altered by more than 10 minutes Guide Link will not be Guide system able to function Can receive TV Guide system e No only via the built in tuner To perform timer recordings with satellite or 39 64 data via a connected satellite or cable receiver please use the External Link feature or your unit s manual timer cable receiver programming How can cancel a timer e Press PROG CHECK and select the desired entry and then press DEL 41 42 programming What happens when unplug my unit from the household mains socket e The TV Guide system data will not be updated If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains for a longer period of time then the TV Guide data is lost And if the unit is left unplugged for approximately 60 minutes the clock and timer recordings that have been set are lost I U Si ra as Page What can or cannot be done using You can play DivX MP3 or still picture JPEG files on a USB memory 51 70 77 the USB port on this unit e You can copy still pictures JPEG files on a USB memory to the HDD BD RE or 74 DVD RAM e You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD 82 e You can connect a video equipment
239. mp3 or MP3 Compression rates 32 kbps to 320 kbps Sampling rate 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Number of Maximum number of folders recognizable except folders for HDD 300 folders including the root folder Number of Maximum number of files recognizable except for files HDD 3000 files ID3 tags compatible JPEG Playable EI ESS G0 Bd Bs ee Be DE media File format JPEG conforming DCF Design rule for Camera File system e Files must have the extension jpg or JPG Number of Between 34 x 34 and 8192 x 8192 pixels pixels Sub sampling is 4 2 2 or 4 2 0 Thawing Time Approx 2 sec in case of SD Card 8 1 M pixels JPEG Number of Maximum number of folders recognizable 99 folders folders including the root folder m GEES GE EG ES Ee GEE Maximum number of folders recognizable 300 folders including the root folder Number of Maximum number of files recognizable 999 files files Rw Gi EJ DEE Maximum number of files recognizable 3000 files HDD Maximum number of files recognizable 9999 files MOTION not supported JPEG Progressive JPEG e It may take a few moments for still pictures to display e When there are many files and or folders some files may not display or be playable DivX Playable EJ USB media File format DivX e Files must have the extension DIVX or divx
240. n N A RQT9430 Notes e Only one piece of DV equipment e g Panasonic s video camera etc can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal e It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment e The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only It cannot be connected to a computer etc e The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly e Depending on the DV equipment the images or audio may not be input properly e Date and time information is not recorded even if displayed on the DV camcorder e You cannot record and play simultaneously e Ed It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times of step or recording or editing g R After finalising chapters for every 5 minutes will be created e EG After finalising chapters for every 8 minutes will be created e EG Regardless of creating the top menu chapters for every 8 minutes will be created Tips When recording finishes The confirmation screen appears Press OK to finish DV camcorder recording To stop recording Press W The confirmation screen appears Press OK If the DV camcorder recording function does not work properly check the connections and DV equipment settings and turn the unit off and back on If that does not work follow the instructions on page 65 Recording via AV3 Input Flexible Recording via AV Input GY El HDD It is possible to record to disc from equip
241. n When copying at normal speed the total data size will change according to the recording mode e The total data size shown may be larger than the sum of the data sizes for each registered item because of data management information being written to the copy destination etc To check the properties of a title and sort Copying list After performing gt 61 3 Press A V to select the title then press OPTION Properties Grouped Titles 4 Press A V to select Properties or Sort then press OK Properties The name recording date channel etc of the selected title are shown You cannot select this item if a title has a check mark Sort All Titles screen only Press A V to select the item then press OK This changes the way that titles are displayed You can select to display titles by No Date Day Channel Start Time and Title Name You cannot select this item if a title has a check mark If you close the Copying list screen the display order is cancelled Tips To return to the previous screen in steps Q Q Press BACK RETURN 9 To view other pages in step 3 Press d lt gt gt While copying after step To stop copying Press and hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds You cannot stop while finalising When you stop High speed copying All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied When you stop Norm
242. n automobile exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed e Do not take apart or short circuit e Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries e Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period of time Store in a cool dark place Using the remote control Aim at the sensor avoiding obstacles up to a maximum range of 7 m directly in front of the unit Remote control signal sensor The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the environment especially temperature humidity and dust Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown To clean this unit wipe with a soft dry cloth e Never use alcohol paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit e Before using chemically treated cloth carefully read the instructions that came with the cloth Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and viewing pleasure Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit s lens over time making it impossible to record or play discs Use the Lens cleaner not included about once every year depending on frequency of use and the operating environment Carefully read the lens cleaner s instructions before use Lens cleaner RP CL720E Do not place the
243. n display gt 90 e When recording in DR mode When copying the title recorded in DR mode at high speed All multiple audio are recorded It is possible to switch audio during the playback of the title e When copying in HG HX HE HL XP SP LP EP FR modes Only one audio is recorded Before copying Copy Select the audio with Preferred Multi Audio in the Setup menu gt 99 Copy Title Playing Select the audio with Multi Audio AD in the Disc menu gt 88 Programmes with subtitles It is possible to display the subtitles when receiving a programme with the subtitles Subtitles appears at the bottom of digital satellite channel information display gt 90 e When recording in DR mode When copying the title recorded in DR mode at high speed Subtitles will be recorded as is It is possible to switch the subtitles during the playback of the title e When copying in HG HX HE HL XP SP LP EP FR modes Subtitles will be recorded but it is not possible to switch off during playback Before copying Copy Select the subtitle language in Preferred Subtitles in the Setup menu 99 and set Automatic in Subtitles in the copy setting screen Copy Title Playing Select the subtitle language in Preferred Subtitles in the Setup menu gt 99 and set On in Subtitles in the Disc menu gt 88 Surround audio You can enjoy surround audio when re
244. n recording using the TV s tuner you can select the recording mode from XP SP LP EP You can also use this function using VIERA Link gt 86 Ee and hold for about 1 second Tips To stop recording Press W Notes e If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording during viewing the analogue or digital terrestrial broadcasting the Direct TV recording stops Playing while you are recording Chasing Playback Allows playback from the beginning of the title you are recording Simultaneous Record and Playback Allows playback of a previous title while recording something else e You can also change the drive and play while recording Press DRIVE SELECT Q During recording Y to select the title to play then Tips To stop play Press W To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR To stop recording After play stops 1 Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR to exit the screen 2 Press i Notes e Chasing Playback and Simultaneous Rec and Play can only be used with programmes of the same encoding system PAL NTSC e Depending on the state of the unit playback may not be possible gt 116 Recording 37 RQT9430 Advanced Recording Operation during Recording To check the recording programme Press STATUS e g while 2 programmes simultaneous recording Recording programme displayed on the TV screen RE
245. ncreases the available disc space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted El Available disc space does not increase after deletion Available disc space increases when you delete the last title the recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted e Available disc space may not increase after erasing a short title Properties mA a EGE G0 a a EG A A Pd EA Title information is shown e g date time Perform steps of Accessing the Title View gt left O Press A V to select Properties then press OK x O 3 a D gt x oO Editing Play Delete Properties Edit Chapter View All Titles Enter Title Name HDD BD RE EPA E a a A a DL You can give a name for the title Perform steps of Accessing the Title View gt left O Press A V to select Enter Title Name then press OK Entering Text gt 84 EPD Even if the group name is changed the title names in the group will not be changed gt 46 Regarding the group name RQT9430 Titles Editing _ Set up Protection Cancel Protection mA EA RAM Use to prevent accidental erasure of titles Perform steps of Accessing the Title View gt 53 O Press A V to select Set up Protection or Cancel Protection then press OK O Press lt 4 to select
246. nd strength of digital satellite broadcast signals Realign the dish if you are receiving a poor signal 1 Press A V to select Signal Condition then press OK 2 Press lt gt to select the input you want to check Satellite Signal Condition Dish Input Channel Name S Quali Signal Strength e Network ID Transport Stream ID Satellite Lock Indicator annel U Gc eel spice The quality and strength of the signal are shown Press A V CH to select the channel Signal Quality Below 2 display red The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the pictures and sound 2 5 display orange The signal quality is basically adequate but brief interference in the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case Over 5 display green Optimum picture and sound quality Signal Strength The display for signal strength is grey O means signal strength 0 10 means signal strength 100 e If the signal is too strong the display will change from grey to red Reduce the signal amplification at your satellite dish e When the signal is weak check that the satellite dish is correctly positioned adjust the satellite dish reception check that the current digital satellite broadcast channel is correctly broadcasting Child Lock You can lock a channel or AV input to prevent access to it freesat Favourites Edit P freesa Child Lock frees
247. nd tracks into 10 preset playlists e Name of the playlist can be changed gt right e New playlist cannot be added e Up to 999 tracks can be registered to each playlist Preparation e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the HDD drive 1 While stopped When MUSIC is not selected press the Yellow button to select MUSIC DIRECT NAVIGATOR Music Menu Total Tracks 53 VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC Albums yy My Favourites Playlists nil Frequently Played J Random Play A OK COOPTION Please select to access music Dareum VIDEO PICTURE music A Y to select item then When Artists is selected Press lt d gt to select the initial of the artist Press A V to select the name of the artist then press OK Press A V to select the album e To register the track press OK and select the track with A V When Albums is selected Press lt d gt to select the initial of the album Press A V to select the album e To register the track press OK and select the track with A V O A Y to select Add to Playlist then A Y to select the playlist to register then g DIRECT NAVIGATOR Playlists S HDD My Favourites a Playlist 01 Playlist 02 Playlist 03 Playlist 04 Playlist 05 Playlist 06 Playlist 07 Playlist 08 Playlist 09 Please select playlist to add to
248. ng a signal booster available from audio visual suppliers If it is not solved by using a signal booster consult the dealer Picture does not appear during timer recording The screen changes automatically e Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on or off To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly turn the unit on e The screen saver function is activated e Set Screen Saver in the Setup menu to Off to turn off the screen saver function The 4 3 aspect ratio picture e Use the TV to change the aspect If your TV does not have that function set 105 expands left and right HDMI Video Mode to Off and Component Resolution to 576i 480i in the iva Setup menu ou ie wlan e If you connect an HDMI cable set Aspect for 4 3 Video in the Setup menu to 16 9 104 e Check the settings for TV Aspect in the Setup menu 104 It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV Refer to your television s operating instructions Titles recorded with 16 9 aspect e 16 9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4 3 aspect in the following cases are stretched vertically E If you recorded or copied using EP or FR recordings 5 hours or longer recording mode If you recorded or copied to a R R DL or RW It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV Refer to your television s operating instructions There is a lot of
249. ng discs and cards e Do not place or store discs and cards in the following locations Direct sunlight Very dusty or humid areas Near a heat source Places that undergo extreme shifts in temperature condensation can occur Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur e Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing Discs to avoid e Discs that are not perfectly circular in shape e Warped discs which may not balance properly in your unit causing improper operation or damage to the unit e Cracked discs e Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels such as may occur with rental discs or improperly cared for discs that were previously labeled or re labeled Reference RQT9430 Frequently Asked Questions How can I enjoy High Quality Video up converted to 1080p e Connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV using an HDMI cable Set HDMI Video Format in the Setup menu to 1080p What equipment is necessary to play multi channel surround sound e You cannot playback multi channel sound on this unit without other equipment You must connect this unit with an HDMI cable an optical digital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio cable to an amplifier with a built in Dolby Digital DTS or MPEG decoder Can the headphones and speakers be directly connected to the unit e You cannot directly connect to the unit Connect through the amplifi
250. ng steps gt 70 Slideshow 1 Press A V lt gt to select the album of Album View or the date of Pictures by Date 2 Press gt PLAY You can also start Slideshow with following steps After performing step 1 gt above Press OPTION Press A V to select Start Slideshow then press OK To end the slideshow Press BACK RETURN 5 Slideshow After performing steps 2 gt 70 Settings 1 Press A V lt gt to select the album of Album View or the date of Pictures by Date 2 Press OPTION 3 Press A V to select Slideshow Settings then press OK Slideshow Settings e To change the display interval After performing steps 1 3 Press A V to select Display interval Please set the following functions Press lt gt to select the desired interval Press A V lt gt to select Set then press OK e To change the transition effect After performing steps 1 3 Press A V to select Transition Effect E Cancet Press lt gt to select the transition effect Fade Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in Motion Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in while it is enlarged reduced or moved up or down Random In addition to the Motion pictures are changed by various methods Press A V lt gt to select Set then press OK e To set repeat play After performing steps
251. o form a group Release Grouping Press lt gt to select Release then press OK e When a group of titles has been selected all the titles in the group are released e When a title in a group has been selected the title is removed from the group Regarding the group name The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles SHDD Time Remaining 45 54 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC SHDD Time Remaining 45 54 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUS J i P Date Channel Time Title Name Titles A Date Channel Time Title Name Se ed 12 36 Bom And Bre AWrathul 2 ann 25 05 12 36 Bom And Bred A Wrathtul Go amp Q 0106 av2 1 35 1 Kus ies 25 05 12 37 Play School Food Friday E 01 06 avt 1 13 XX Rec time ame 0000F owon M Not viewed P Not viewed w w Page 01 01 Page 01 01 ok OOPTION IT Select oK OPTION a1 Select erm Evo picture musie gt play seer To change the group name 1 Press A W to select the group then press OPTION 2 Press A V to select Edit then press OK 3 Press A V to select Enter Title Name then press OK 4 Enter the name gt 84 Entering Text e Even if the group name is changed the title names in the group will not be changed Notes e This function is only available for vide
252. o included Note e DL is also included DL is a single side dual layer disc e BD RE Ver 1 0 with a cartridge cannot be used with this unit It cannot be used even if it is taken out from the cartridge Use the BD RE compliant to Blu ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 2 1 e For BD R finalised with this unit or other equipment only playback is possible on this unit gt 96 138 Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods For details please refer to the respective operating N 20 YS RQT9430 Disc type DVD RAM DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW RAM4 7 R4 7 RDL Standard symbol RAM E before finalisation before before after finalisation finalisation finalisation after finalisation after finalisation Data that can be recorded and Video Video played Still picture Quality in which video is recorded Standard definition SD quality Recording mode in which video is XP SP LP EP FR recorded Rewritable O O Timer recording Copying HD Copy Once titles gt 33 O Copy in standard definition quality XP SP LP EP FR mode is possible Copying HD No Copy titles gt 33 O Copy in standard definition quality XP SP LP EP FR mode is possible Play on other players GW can be played e Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment back on Panasonic can be played back only on equipment compatible with this
253. o select Copy Video MPEG2 then A Y to select Start Copying then e SD Video on the Panasonic s video camera etc are automatically registered on the copy list 4 P to select Yes then With Other Equipment Tips Notes To stop copying e You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card or in the HDD of Press and hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds Panasonic s video camera etc with this unit You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD RAM e You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video 69 RQT9430 Playing still pictures HDD Em EJ uss sD e You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a BD RE DVD R DVD R DL CD R CD RW USB memory and SD card e You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying Preparation EM ga WA EJ Insert a disc USB memory or SD card e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the drive Select BD for any discs card USB memory or the discs while stopped Press A V to select Play Pictures JPEG then press OK Then go to step gt right EJ It will go to step gt right automatically if it is only still pictures that is recorded Disc e g Play Video DivX Play Pictures JPEG Play Copy Music MP3 CD is inserted aa e g IEA Copy Video AVCHD Copy Video MPEG2 Play Pictures JPEG C
254. off when the TV e If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV VIERA with the input is switched Intelligent Auto Standby setting activated on the TV when switching the TV input the unit will be automatically turned to standby For details please read the operating instructions of the TV General Issues Displays Page The display is dim e Change Unit s Display in the Setup menu 104 0 00 is flashing on the unit s e Set the clock 15 display The displayed time of this unit is e Times shown may disagree with actual times different from the actual recording R The remaining capacity does not increase 7 time or MP3 recording time even if titles are deleted e Available space on a DVD RW DVD Video format or RW disc increases when you delete the last title space may increase slightly when you delete other titles e If you record or edit about 200 times or more the remaining capacity of DVD R DVD R DL R and R DL is reduced and then recording or editing may be disabled for the second layer on DVD R DL and R DL this happens after about 60 times e While searching the elapsed time may not be displayed accurately Compared to the actual recorded The displayed recording play time is converted from the number of frames at time the elapsed time displayed 29 97 frames equal to 0 999 seconds to one second There will be a slight is less difference between the time displayed and the actual ela
255. omes possible Reference RQT9430 Specifications Structure of folders displayed by this unit You can play MP3 and still pictures JPEG on this unit by making folders as shown below However depending on the method of writing data writing software play may not be in the order you numbered the folders Structure of MP3 folders USB Prefix with 3 digit numbers in Root the order you want to play SS 001 Folder them S L 001 track mp3 file track t 002track mp3 003track mp3 L MNs 002 Folder 003 Folder 001track mp3 t 002track mp3 SS L 003track mp3 L_ 004track mp3 001track mp3 002track mp3 003track mp3 Order of play Structures of still picture folders USB Files inside a folder are Root displayed in the order they 59000001 jpg were updated or taken Hy 002 Folder P0000003 jpg P0000004 jpg P0000005 jpg 003 Folder t P0000006 jpg I P0000007 jpg P0000008 jpg L__ P0000009 jpg Tt 004 Folder P0000010 j Order of play pooa00 t tpg L P0000012jpg RAM The following y can be displayed on this unit 1 Still pictures on the root xxx Numbers folder can also be XXX Letters displayed 2 Folders can be created on Heo other equipment However these folders cannot be selected as a copying destination e f a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment t
256. ontent e Letterbox When connected to a 4 3 aspect television widescreen picture is shown in the letterbox style gt 139 4 3 Aspect for 4 3 Video To play a 4 3 title when connected with an HDMI cable set how to show pictures on a 16 9 widescreen television 4 3 picture from HDMI output will be slightly smaller than that from the other outputs e g Scart and component this is not a malfunction of the unit 4 3 Picture output expands left or right 16 9 Picture is output as original aspect with side panels o Teletext Select the Teletext display mode gt 91 FASTEXT Four differently coloured subjects are situated at the bottom of the screen To access more information about one of these subjects press the appropriately colour button This facility enables fast access to information on the subjects shown List Four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the bottom of the screen Each of these numbers can be altered and stored in this unit Blue LED Set the lighting method for the lamp on the SD card slot On SD inserted When this unit is turned on and SD card is inserted the lamp is lighted Off ZN 104 ay RQT9430 TV System Change this setting if you connect an NTSC television or to record NTSC video from another source PAL Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi system television Programmes recorded us
257. ontrol Using the FUNCTION MENU display to operate this unit This function is available with the TV that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV Display this unit s FUNCTION MENU display using the TV remote control e If this unit is turned in standby this unit will turn on automatically Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control then press OK Pause live TV programme PEGE This function is available with the TV that supports HDAVI Control 3 or later You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand If you stop the Pause Live TV function then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV When you want to pause the TV programme Turn on the Pause Live TV function using the TV remote control e This unit turns on automatically When you want to resume Display the Control Panel gt right then press OK e The TV programme resumes Refer to Notes on page 93 To pause the TV programme you are watching Pause Live TV Tips To stop Pause Live TV Press Y while the Control Panel is displayed Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK Using the OPTION menu window to
258. optical coaxial Using an Audio Cable not included for Better Sound Use this connection to play sound through speakers connected to an amplifier or system component Amplifier or System Component AUDIO IN R L This unit Using a Optical Digital Audio Cable not included for Better Sound This method allows you to enjoy multi channel surround sound E With OPTICAL Amplifier or System Component OPTICAL n Bn fully with this side up Do not bend cable sharply This unit OPTICAL E With COAXIAL Amplifier or System Component coma IN This unit COAXIAL e Connect an amplifier or system component with a built in Dolby Digital DTS or MPEG decoder e Adjust settings in Digital Audio Output gt 103 Notes e When this unit is connected to an amplifier with a digital audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting HDMI Audio Output to Off in the Setup menu gt 105 In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television e You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not meant for DVD e Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable check the terminal N shape of the equipment to be connected 114 RQT9430 Connecting with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface Terminal When connected to an HDMI compatible unit an uncom
259. opy Pictures JPEG Play Copy Music MP3 USB device is inserted oK ORETURN e g EJ Play Video AVCHD Copy Video AVCHD Copy Video MPEG2 Play Pictures JPEG Copy Pictures JPEG SD card is inserted M e Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each media If the menu screen gt above is not displayed display it by performing the following operation R TS sD 1 Press FUNCTION MENU 2 E SD Press A V to select Playback then press OK USB Press A V to select Others then press OK Press A W to select USB device then press OK The display below automatically appears when you insert an SD 1 With the unit stopped HDD RAM e When PICTURE is not selected press the Green button to select PICTURE e To switch the display method Still pictures copied from SD cards and USB memories are grouped by the shooting date on Pictures by Date screen Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance Press OPTION Press A W to select Album View or Pictures by Date then press OK DIRECT NAVIGATOR J Album View DIRECT NAVIGATOR Pictures by Date SHDD Time Remaining 20 08 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC SHDD Time Remaining 20 08 DR VIDEO PICTURE JMUSIC Abused ar2006 omaani Total 19 Totals Total 19
260. opying 1 programme can be recorded to HDD Recording from DV input while Recording via AV3 input e 2 dish inputs are required to record 2 programmes simultaneously The recording lacks the beginning or ending part of the programme although the timer recording was set on TV Guide Timer recording does not stop even when ll is pressed e This occurs when the broadcast signals are not correct We recommend you set the timer again allowing enough time for the start and end time Guide Link function allows you to set the start time earlier and the end time later up to a maximum of 10 minutes LINK EXT L on the units display disappears 28 64 e When using the linked timer recording with external equipment press EXT The timer programme remains even after recording finishes e The timer programme remains if set to daily weekly or series timer recording 39 40 Cannot record Cannot copy e You can not record to the disc by pressing the REC with a cartridge cannot be recorded or copied RAM The disc is unformatted Format the disc e The disc is protected with DVD Management or Blu ray Disc Management e Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be copied e You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached its limit Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc e In the following situations you cannot copy Dele
261. or Discs Disc gt EE SD card PED EEE ER HDD BD RE BD R Insert a disc or card e g BJ Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each media Play Video AVCHD Copy Video AVCHD Copy Video MPEG2 Play Pictures JPEG Copy Pictures JPEG SD card is inserted OK RETURN A Y to select Copy Video AVCHD then 3 When copying from an SD card A Y to select Copy to HDD or Copy to Blu ray Disc then C Y to select the title then i SS A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary titles e Press If again to cancel All the recordings on the same date become a title O 4 P to select Start then Tips To stop copying Press and hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds RQT9430 From a video equipment HDD of Panasonic s video camera etc gt EER e You cannot playback HD Video in the HDD of Panasonic s video camera etc with this unit You must copy the files to the HDD or disc TTTS gt a HDD BD RE BD R Preparation e Turn on both this unit and the Panasonic s video camera etc D Connect the Panasonic s video camera etc to this unit 2 Select the appropriate mode that makes the Panasonic s video camera etc ready for data transfer such as PC CONNECT on the Panason
262. ord audio video images on a DV tape You cannot press INPUT e Press EXT LINK to cancel EXT LINK Standby mode 64 SELECT to select external input other than AV2 aG eE CAIO Music Page Tracks could not be copied to the If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions they will not HDD be copied e Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD DA specifications copy control CDs etc cannot be guaranteed e Bonus tracks may not be copied Title of the newly released CD e Title cannot be acquired if the title is not registered in the built in Gracenote 82 cannot be acquired Database Connection to the network is necessary to acquire title for the newly released CD ID3 tag of an MP3 file is not completely displayed e Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit 130 RQT9430 Editing Issues HDD and Discs Page Cannot edit e You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space 32 53 Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space 95 101 Cannot format e The disc is dirty Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry 117 e Disc may be defective or of poor quality e You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit 95 Cannot create chapters e The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off Cannot mark the start point or the or remove the
263. os and not available for music and still pictures Search lt lt O There are 5 search speeds Each press increases the search speed Up to 3 speeds Press gt PLAY to restart normal playback Only primary video is played while performing this operation During playback Tips Depending on the disc search may not be possible You can skip to the beginning or the end of Title Chapter Skip is operated for each chapter During playback or while paused eJ or gt Each press increases the number of skips DivX Press k lt to return to the beginning of the title currently playing Quick View Play x1 3 Except It will not work even if it is finalised ETNEN Divx Allows you to increase the play speed slightly without distorting the audio O During playback Press and hold Press again to return to normal speed Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR HG HX HE HL mode titles or ENA Only primary video is played while performing this operation Direct Play During playback you can access specific titles or scenes through direct entry of the numbered buttons H gt 0 gt DO 0 gt 1 gt 5 Input a 2 digit number 0 5 e g 5 0 gt 5 1 gt 5 Slow motion Play Except DivX While paused lt lt Or There are 5 slow motion speeds Each press increa
264. over The HDMI cable is damaged U76 e HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright protection U77 e Due to the current disc not having authorised copyright information video output is not performed u88 e There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording playing or 124 copying there was a power failure or the AC mains lead was disconnected while the unit was on The unit is carrying out its recovery process This process restores the unit to normal operation The unit is not broken Wait until the message disappears U99 e The unit fails to operate properly Press c on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode Now press 0 1 on the main unit again to turn the unit on X HOLD e The HOLD function is activated 108 E Press and hold OK and BACK RETURN 4 at the same time until X HOLD disappears 20 x The message is alternately displayed SA RQT9430 On the TV Page Authorisation Error e You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a 52 different registration code You cannot play the content on this unit DivX Cannot finish recording completely e The programme was copy protected e The HDD or disc may be full e The maximum number of title has been exceeded 35 Cannot playback e You tried to play a title recorded
265. ow other pages Press l lt q gt gt Multiple deleting Select with A V lt gt then press IM Repeat A check mark appears Press Ill again to cancel O lt gt to select Delete then The item is deleted RQT9430 Playing music Playing MP3 files R USB You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD R DVD R DL CD R CD RW and USB memory e You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording 1 While stopped Insert a disc or USB memory E Play Video DivX Copy Video AVCHD Play Pictures JPEG Copy Video LMDC Play Copy Music MP3 CD is inserted Onen Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each media E Playback will automatically start if only MP3 is recorded 2 A Y to select Play Copy Music MP3 then n Playback will automatically start e g DIRECT NAVIGATOR Music List CD MP3 March Moon Folder Mexican pops No Track Name Artist Leon Playing track 0002 Do this flower open 0003 _ Go to there from here Leon 0004 Goodby SAKURA Leon T 0005 T eastern wind has gone Leon d OPTION or EN Slideshow copy Al Perum D TEORA Playing different track Press A V to select the track then press OK Ti
266. pend on the selected drive or type of disc DIGA NONE DD Time Remaining 22 30 DR ij Playback Y to select an item then e If you select Others then press OK the following screen appears Press A V to select an item then press OK Ext Link Standby DV Automatic Recordin If you press BACK RETURN 3 you can return to the previous screen Tips To exit the FUNCTION MENU display 4 gt to select the item e Normal Normal output e Side cut The black bars on the right and left sides of the 16 9 image disappear and the image is enlarged Please note that the right and left sides of the image are cut off when the black bar is not displayed Display as frame Enlarged display on the 4 3 aspect with black bar 16 9 image with ratio TV screen erased with Side black bars on cut the right and left Displayed with black Enlarged display bars on right and left with black bar on the 16 9 aspect erased with Side ratio TV screen cut Only when TV Aspect gt 104 is set to Letterbox e Zoom The black bars on the top and bottom sides of the 4 3 image disappear and the image is enlarged Please note that the top and bottom sides of the image are cut off when the black bar is not displayed 4 3 image with black bars at the top and bottom Displayed as frame on the 16 9 aspect ratio TV screen Enlarged display w
267. plifiers is connected using HDMI cable and TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal Setup before connecting to the amplifiers HDMI Video Format You can only select items compatible with the connected equipment If you are concerned about output picture quality it may be improved by changing the setting 576p 480p 720p 1080i 1080p When outputting 1080p signal we recommend using High Speed HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo as shown on the cover and are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion etc Automatic Automatically selects the output resolution best suited to the connected television 1080p 1080i 720p or 576p 480p BD Video 24p Output When playing BD Video recorded in 24 frames this unit displays each frame at 1 24 second intervals the same interval originally shot with the film movie e This item is effective only when the unit is connected to a TV with an HDMI terminal that supports 1080 24p input On Images in 24p are output in 24p as they are Only when HDMI Video Format is Automatic or 1080p However When video is being output at 24 frames images from any other terminal than the HDMI terminal may not be output properly When images other than 24p are played images are output at 60p Off HDMI Audio Output On Off When connected to TV with HDMI cable and connected to amplifiers not compatible to HDMI with a DIGITAL AUDIO OUT termin
268. pment Refer to the equipment s operating instructions e The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some cases e When Ext Link is set to Ext Link 2 this function does not work if the input signal is NTSC system e Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording are close to each other To divide the titles go to Divide Title gt 54 e While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording AV1 output terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of AV1 Output setting gt 105 e EXT LINK recording is available on HDD only e During EXT LINK standby mode or recording playback is available on both HDD and BD drive However during EXT LINK recording BD Video still pictures or music cannot be played back e When EXT L lights on the unit s display Direct TV Recording is unavailable Recording from an External Device This unit AVS IN SVIDEO VIDEO L MONO AUDIO R Ooo DV cable IEEE 1394 4 pin S Video _ I udio Video cable cable Other video equipment ane ee Connect to Audio Video output terminals The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the VIDEO terminal e f the audio output of the external device is monaural connect to L MONO on the AV3 input t
269. power supply cord shall remain readily operable To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such rights in that content Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback 140 S RQT9430 Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products packaging and or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries please take Sa them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC By disposing of these products and batteries correctly you will help to save valuable resources an
270. pressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted enabling you to enjoy high quality digital video and audio with just one cable When connecting to an HDMI compatible HDTV High Definition Television the output can be switched to 1080p 1080i or 720p HD video e Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo as shown on the cover e When outputting 1080p signal please use the HDMI cables 5 0 meters or less Regarding VIERA Link HDAVI Control function When connecting with a Panasonic TV VIERA ora receiver equipped with the HDAVI Control function linked operations would be possible gt 86 Linked Operations with the TV VIERA Link HDAVI Control Q Link e Non HDMI compliant cables cannot be utilized e It is recommended that you use Panasonic s HDMI cable Recommended part number RP CDHG10 1 0 m RP CDHG15 1 5 m RP CDHG20 2 0 m RP CDHG30 3 0 m RP CDHG50 5 0 m etc Using an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface Cable not included TV Receiver HDMI OUT HDMI IN AV This unit AVI TV HDMI AV OUT Connecting with a Panasonic TV VIERA If the 21 pin Scart cable is connected the Direct TV Recording and Pause Live TV function is available gt 37 e Set HDMI Audio Output to On gt 105 The default setting is On e To enjoy High Quality Video up converted to
271. ps To exit the screen Press EXIT Playback of track will stop If the menu screen gt above is not displayed display it by performing the following operation 1 Press FUNCTION MENU 2 EE ee Press A V to select Playback then press OK USB Press A V to select Others then press OK Press A V to select USB device then press OK Using the tree screen to find a folder 1 While the Music List is displayed OPTION 2 A F to select Select Folder then oK Selected folder No Total folders XS If the folder has no track is displayed as folder number DIRECT NAVIGATOR Select Folder gt 0 09 OCD MP3 March Moon MP3 music 01 My favorite 001 Brazilian pops 002 Chinese pops 004 Hungarian pops You cannot select 6 Japanese p folders that contain no compatible files 0 e 006 Japanese pops 007 Mexican pops 008 Philippine pops qos Swedish pops 001 Momoko Q02 Standard number se Qm 4 V 4 gt to select a folder then The Music List for the folder appears Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 3 Notes When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during music playback the screen saver is displayed only when Screen Saver in the Setup menu is set to On gt 104 To return to the previous screen press BA
272. psed time e g Only when recording in NTSC actual one hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds This does not affect the recording The clock does not display on the e Ensure Power Save is set to Off 107 unit when switched to standby Available disc space display is e Available disc space display may be different from actual Varying may be showing different from what was large especially when recorded in DR mode used 123 Reference RQT9430 Troubleshooting Guide General Issues Operation e One of the unit s safety devices may have been activated Reset the unit as follows Press 0 1 on the main unit to switch to standby mode If the unit doesn t switch to standby mode reset the unit gt 122 To restore the unit if it freezes Page Cannot operate the TV with the e Change the manufacturer code on the remote control 108 unit s remote control e It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after 122 changing the batteries Cannot operate the disc e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the BD drive when operating the disc 26 The remote control doesn t work e The remote control code is wrong Change to the correct code 122 e The batteries are depleted Replace them with new ones T e Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the main unit 7 e Remove obstacles between the remote control and
273. put 11 Green input 12 Reserved 12 Reserved 7 91113 1517 19 13 Red ground 13 Red ground _ 14 Blanking ground 14 Blanking ground N 15 Red output chrominance output 15 Red input chrominance input 21 16 Blanking output 16 Blanking input 17 Video output ground 17 Video output ground nes a s 18 Video input ground 18 Video input ground A ay a ee e A 19 Video output luminance output 19 Video output 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 20 Video input 20 Video input luminance input 21 Ground 21 Ground Using a fully wired 21 pin Scart cable You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television gt 86 You can enjoy high quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television when you are viewing in the standard definition SD quality Set AV1 Output in the Setup menu to RGB 1 without component or RGB 2 without component gt 105 AV2 Input settings in the Setup menu gt 105 f N 112 Pi RQT9430 e You can connect this unit to a TV using the audio video AV cable S Video cable or component video cables instead of the 21 pin Scart cable gt 10 11 12 112 Using an Audio Video Cable not included Using an S Video Cable not included TV The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the VIDEO OUT terminal Actual results depend on the AUDIO IN VIDEO television R
274. pying during copy Press and hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds Notes This unit saves the information on up to 12 000 still pictures and 30 SD cards If additional still pictures are imported then the older information will be deleted Copying using the copying list m Eos GE e ES 5 GS Go Cea GeP RAM 1 While stopped Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A V to select Copy then press OK Copy Cancel All Source BD DVD 4 Copy Direction BD DVD HDD gt Destination Copy Mode CAPPICcTURE ign speed 3 Create List Start Copying Select the copy direction oren If you are not going to change the registered list press V several times gt step Set the copy direction If you are not going to change the copying direction press V gt step O 4 Press A V to select Copy Direction then press gt 2 Press A W to select Source then press OK 3 Press A W to select the drive then press OK 4 Press A W to select Destination then press OK Press A W to select the drive then press OK The same drive as the copy source cannot be copied Press lt to confirm O Set the copy mode If you are not going to change the copy mode press Y twice gt step O O Press A W to select Copy Mode then press gt D Press A W to select Format then press OK
275. r MPEG is set to PCM However in this case audio is output as 2ch from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal DA a EEE EPS G00 A a BS AG Ae Bd byes E Nad EN 3 channel or over only including a centre channel When On the volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue easier to hear Other Menu Position Change where this menu screen appears on your TV Convenient Functions RQT9430 90 Information Messages Digital Satellite Channel Information You can display the information about programmes programme name broadcast time etc With the unit stopped STATUS to show the screen information When the digital satellite channel information is being displayed Press STATUS again and detailed information will be displayed only when For info press 4 is displayed Digital satellite channel information Status message gt 91 HDD l 1 30 DR 951 IBBC ONE Wales For info pressG STATUS Detailed information FSOS1 BBC ONE Wales 13 06 LICS Channel BBC News at one 13 00 13 30 Now gt For info press i STATUS c19 Now gt Exit info National and international news from the BBC followed by Weather S Genre News and Factual Subtitles TXT No information STATUS Programme name and Broadcast time Channel and Cat Station Name ategory ERTA Aleesat Channels For info press iJ Multi Audio
276. r mode than 576p 480p or Component Resolution gt 105 is set to 720p or 1080i On If there is no operation for 5 minutes or more the displayed screen switches to the other states automatically When the DIRECT NAVIGATOR Copying list DELETE Navigator or FUNCTION menu is displayed the screen saver is not displayed When music is played the display returns to the screen saver mode Playback continues When still pictures are shown except for slideshows the display returns to the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen The display returns to the screen saver mode when it is paused by the Pause Live TV Pause status will continue Off Connection A V select Connection gt S Connection TV Aspect Aspect for 4 3 Video TV System HDMI Connection Component Resolution AV1 Output AV2 Settings c TV Aspect This setting needs to be changed when connected to a 4 3 standard aspect TV 16 9 4 3 Letterbox Notes e Aspect 4 3 16 9 4 3 standard aspect television 16 9 widescreen television e 16 9 When connected to a 16 9 widescreen television However the 4 3 aspect ratio picture expands left and right When connected to a 4 3 aspect television side picture is trimmed for 16 9 picture gt 139 Pan amp Scan The 4 3 setting may not work and the pictures may be shown in the letterbox style depending on the c
277. rations After performing steps gt above Create Select the point where you want to start a Chapter new chapter while viewing the title DIRECT NAVIGATOR Edit Chapter Mark Supp Time Remaining 15 08 DR VIDEO picTURE MUSIC 007 SOCCER Play gt F T fi To insert chaptar pasion fes Press RETURN goto Saver Y 0 00 00 n Chapter view Edit chapter Mark Press OK at the point you want to divide e Repeat this step to divide at other points Press BACK RETURN 4 to go to Chapter View screen After performing steps gt above Delete Press lt gt to select Delete then press OK Chapter e Once deleted the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored Make certain before proceeding e Select Combine Chapters gt below when you only want to delete the division point between chapters The recorded contents will not be deleted Press lt gt to select Combine then press OK e The selected chapter and following chapter are combined Combine Chapters 56 Multiple editing gt 53 is possible RQT9430 Copying Titles There are following copying methods Copy Title Playing Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc gt 60 Make a copying list and then copy You can set the unit to copy titles in the way you want gt 61 Copy AVCHD High definition video AVCHD format can be cop
278. reated cannot be recorded using this unit e During EXT LINK standby mode or recording you cannot press INPUT SELECT to select external input other than AV2 RQT9430 With Other Equipment 66 Recording from an External Device Recording from a DV Camcorder mA ERS EE G00 Bad A a AS Preparation e Turn on this unit e If you record to a disc insert a disc gt 117 EZ GLU If the disc is protected release protection gt 94 e When the output signal from the external device is NTSC change the TV System to NTSC in the Setup menu gt 104 e This unit connects to DV camcorder with DV cable 1 Turn on the DV equipment and pause play at the point you want to start recording The following screen appears DV Automatic Recording Record from the DV unit Rec to HDD Rec to Blu ray Disc DVD When the screen does not appear Perform step gt above 1 Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A W to select Others then press OK 3 Press A W to select DV Automatic Recording then press OK You can proceed to step O gt below A Y to select Rec to HDD or Rec to Blu ray Disc DVD then Q It may take a while for the next screen to display while preparing to record REC MODE 3 Ly to select the recording mode DR HG HX HE HL FR mode cannot be selected lt to select Start the
279. rom radio service It takes time before play starts This is normal on DivX video DivX Picture stops Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB DivX i rd 12 8 Cannot see the beginning of the title played RQT9430 If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable When gt PLAY is pressed on this unit s remote control you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV Using d return to the beginning of the title at verelcollateMtt iei m Recording Timer Recording Copying External input Page Timer recording does not work properly e The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap is displayed Correct the programme e The programme is not in timer recording standby The timer icon in the timer recording list is grey 1 Press PROG CHECK 2 Press A W to select the programme and press the Red button Confirm the timer icon turns red e The clock is not correct Set the clock e The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be correct It is recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes 41 41 15 28 Cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously e It cannot in following conditions Record 2 programmes from external input When performing high speed c
280. rting 123 Type All Channels 2 freesatHome NN 3 freesatSSU 7 4 Brit Shorts 5 The channel list appears 6 WELL Glass 7 GROOVE DS To display the type of the selected channel press the Blue button Each time you press the Blue button the type will be displayed as follows Free TV gt Radio gt Data gt All Channels gt Free TV gt To sort the channel press the Yellow button Each time you press the Yellow button the item will be displayed as follows 123 channel number order gt ABC channel name order gt A Y to select the desired channel then G4 Selecting a channel without using the channel list To select desired channel Press A V CH You can perform this operation after step To directly enter channels You can also select channels with the numbered buttons e g p 5 gt OK 88 8 gt 8 gt OK 1234 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 INPUT SELECT A 4 S gS o a oO a GY a CL jC J Tips To set the channel list gt 98 Channel Settings Notes e There are no programme guide information in other satellite mode only list of channel name is available e Channel number is indicated on the unit s display as an example S1234 RQT9430 Playback Refer to Advanced Playback gt 45 to 47 for detailed information HDD BD RE BD RIRAM RI R DLI RW
281. s OK to set To reset the ratings level settings While pressing and holding OK g g press and hold the numbered button 1 2 or 3 With the unit stopped corresponding to the code set in step for more than 5 seconds to set Press OK to complete When the following indicator appears on the unit s display 0 Press 4 OPEN CLOSE to open the disc tray 2 Press DRIVE SELECT to select the BD drive On the main unit Press and hold REC and gt X1 3 for about 5 seconds To restore the unit if it freezes Change the code on the remote control to match the code On the main unit displayed for the main unit gt step Press and hold 0 1 for more than 10 seconds The unit is turned in standby Tips To eject the disc forcibly To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 3 On the main unit To exit the screen 1 Press to switch to standby mode Press EXIT If the unit doesn t switch to standby mode restore the unit gt above While the unit is turned in standby Press and hold W and CH at the same time for about 5 seconds Before requesting service make the following checks If you are in doubt about some of the check points or if the solutions indicated in the chart do not solve the problem consult your dealer for instructions Updating to the latest software may solve the problem gt 111 The following does not indicate a pro
282. s W twice gt step 4 Press A V to select Create List then press gt Copy Cancel All Destination Capacity 4343MB Size OMB 0 Een 1 No Size Title New item Total 0 2 Copy Mode g Create List 7 Start Copying g OPTION Create copy list onerum 2 Press A V to select New item then press OK 3 Press A V to select the title then press If A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary items e Press I again to cancel e The items will be copied in the order of the copying list If you want to specify the order repeat selecting one item at a time e To show other pages Press kd lt q PP O Press OK e To edit the copying list gt 61 You cannot start copying when the value of Size gt 62 exceeds 100 Destination Capacity is not sufficient 5 Press lt to confirm Set other settings If you are not going to change these settings press W twice gt step 4 Press A V to select Other setting then press gt Subtitles Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording mode other than High Speed is selected 2 Press A V to select Subtitles then press OK 3 Press A V to select Automatic or Off then press OK e If Automatic is selected Subtitle in the source titles will be copied e If O
283. s in recorded in DR mode or copied from HD video AVCHD format Select the subtitle language in the case of multiple languages Subtitle Style Select the subtitle style recorded on the disc Audio channel EE Em El Change audio during playback LR L R Angle EYE Change the number to select an angle Sound track Subtitle language ENG English DAN Danish THA Thai FRA French POR Portuguese POL Polish DEU German RUS Russian CES Czech ITA Italian JPN Japanese SLK Slovak ESP Spanish CHI Chinese HUN Hungarian NLD Dutch KOR Korean FIN Finnish SVE Swedish MAL Malay x Others NOR Norwegian VIE Vietnamese Audio attributes LPCM MDigital QDigital 0 TrueHD DTS DTS HD MPEG Signal type k kHz Sampling frequency b bit Number of bits ch channel Number of channels Notes e You cannot make a change when there is no recording e Some discs allow changes to soundtracks subtitles and angles only by using the disc s menus gt 26 Play Menu Repeat Play This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed Select the item for repeat play Depending on the disc the items that can be selected will differ Select Off to cancel Picture Menu Mode Select the picture quality mode during play Normal Default setting Soft Soft picture with fewer video artifacts Fine Details are sharper Cinema Mellows movies enhances detail in
284. s with capacities from 4 GB to 32 GB Copying deleting and setting e When there are a lot of folders and files it may sometimes take a few hours protection takes a long time e When repeating copying or deleting it may sometimes take a long time 95 Format the disc or card Still pictures JPEG do not e The images that were edited on the PC such as Progressive JPEG etc may 135 playback normally not play back 131 Reference RQT9430 Troubleshooting Guide CEES Network Page can t connect to the network e Has the LAN cable come unplugged Check that the LAN cable is properly 115 connected e Have you plugged in a modular cable for use with a telephone into the LAN 115 terminal on this unit Connect with a straight LAN cable e Is the power for the modem or broadband router turned on Turn the power on for each device e Is there a mistake in the network settings Follow any instructions you may have received from your ISP Internet Service Provider and make changes to the settings e Are the broadband router settings correct Read the operating instructions for the broadband router e Is the broadband router and or modem correctly connected Check the operating instructions for each device and connect accordingly While using my PC cannot e Does your Internet Service Provider ISP or service contract prevent multiple connect to the n
285. satellites that you can receive in your area This setup is not required if you are only viewing or recording from freesat channels Search and store TV programmes of the other satellite service automatically These steps are not necessary if the setup has been completed by your local dealer or freesat registered dealer 1 Q to turn the unit on 0 O A V to select Others then Y to select Setup then 14 7 O A y to select Tu n l ng 5 the n freesat Favourites Edit freesat Channel List freesat Auto Setup Other Satellite Channel List O Other Satellite Tuning Menu EXIT Signal Condition Child Lock Preferred Multi Audio Preferred Subtitles D Cn RETURN Q A Y to select Other Satellite resus Manual Tuning Tuning Menu then Dist Setup C A Y to select Auto Setup p sector comer then Channel Type gt freesat and other satellite channels Tips soo To cancel the Auto Setup i Press EXIT 4 gt to select the desired satellite Notes You can select from a list of following satellites e To initialise all settings gt 107 Shipping e Astra2 Eurobird Condition e Astra The dish will need to be repositioned to receive from these satellites e Hotbird The dish will need to be repositioned to receive from these satellites e All Any satellites that the dish can pick up from its current posi
286. sc or Copy to HDD 73 RQT9430 Copying still pictures HDD GW DEE EG e Pictures copied from SD card and USB memory will be categorised according to the shooting date Pictures without shooting date will be categorised using the creation date e You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD R DVD R DL CD R CD RW or USB memory e f the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files folders to be copied exceeds the maximum gt 135 copying will stop partway through e You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation e Timer recording will not start while copying still pictures Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory Copy All Pictures E CEP 4 While stopped Insert the USB memory The menu is automatically displayed e f the menu is not displayed gt 70 USB device Copy Video AVCHD Copy Video MPEG2 Play Pictures JPEG Copy Pictures JPEG Copy All Pictures JPEG Play Copy Music MP3 USB device is inserted ok O RETURN Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the USB memory 2 Press A V to select Copy Pictures JPEG then OK Press lt gt to select Copy then OK m will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the Direct Navigator for the added pictures Tips To stop copying during copy Press and
287. sc contents Tips To exit the on screen display Press DISPLAY Disc Menu Video The video recording method appears Signal Type e Primary Video Video The video recording method appears Soundtrack Select the type of audio or language e Secondary Video Video Select on off of images The video recording method appears Soundtrack Select on off of audio and the language Soundtrack m except the title copied the title in DR mode or the high definition video AVCHD format GE El The disc s audio attributes appear gt right Audio attributes Select the audio and language gt right Audio attributes Sound track Subtitle language DivX Select the soundtrack number e Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one audio type RQT9430 Subtitles Turn the subtitle on off and select the language gt below Language Epp except the title copied the title in DR mode or the high definition video AVCHD format Ew Ea Only discs that contain subtitle on off information Turn the subtitle on off e Subtitle on off information cannot be recorded using this unit DivX Turn the subtitle on off and select the subtitle number e Text or subtitle number is displayed even if there are not multiple subtitles Multi Audio AD EMA titles recorded in DR mode or copied from HD video AVCHD format Switch in the case of multiple audio Subtitle Language EPP title
288. scs or copy from HDD or discs e SD Memory Card from 8 MB to 2 GB e SDHC Memory Card from 4 GB to 32 GB Type 1 Including miniSD Card and microSD Card 2 Including miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card The card types mentioned above will be referred to as SD card in these operating instructions Standard symbol BA Data that can be Still pictures JPEG played HD Video AVCHD format Still pictures JPEG e It can be copied to from HDD BD RE or DVD RAM Data that can be SD Video MPEG2 format copied HD Video AVCHD format e SD Video shot with a Panasonic s video camera etc can be copied to the HDD or DVD RAM gt 69 e HD Video shot with a Panasonic s video camera etc can be copied to the HDD BD RE or BD R gt 68 You can insert directly into the SD card slot Instructions 1 A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card 2 A miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card Suitable SD cards e When using SD cards 4 GB or larger only SD cards that display the SDHC logo can be used e Usable memory is slightly less than the card capacity e Please confirm the latest information on the following website http panasonic co jp pavc global cs This site is in English only e If the SD card is formatted on other equipment the time necessary for recording may be longer Also if the SD card is formatte
289. ses the speed Press gt PLAY to restart normal playback Notes e If continued for approx 5 minutes slow motion play pauses automatically except Eee allows slow motion in the forward direction only Only primary video is played while performing this operation e You cannot perform this operation when you playback the radio programme Frame by Frame Viewing Display the subtitle during play Except DivX HDD It is possible to display the subtitles during the playback a 5 if the programme with subtitle is recorded with DR While paused ai De mode Each press shows the next or previous frame Press and hold to advance or reverse frame by SS frame in succession Press gt PLAY to restart normal playback It will switch between On Off every time it is pressed Notes allows Frame by Frame in the forward direction only PRA Eb DivX Only primary video is played while performing this operation Display with Subtitles in the Disc menu e You cannot perform this operation when you playback the radio gt 88 Subtitles programme i Time Slip Except ADA EMA Divx TIME SLIP Notes 1 During playback When playing DVD R DL Dual Layer single sided and R DL 4 Double Layer single sided 2 A to select the time then DVD R DL Dual Layer single sided and R DL Double Layer single sided discs have two writable layers on one side If there
290. smaller than the original title after conversion You can save HDD capacity by deleting the original title after conversion Title DR Available disc space y Converting to other mode TT avait disc space Title HL y Deleting the original data Title HL vitae disc space The original title may be deleted automatically after conversion if the title is copy restricted gt 33 0 Titles with the HD No Copy restriction T Tities with the HD Copy Once restriction High Speed Copy Speed to copy the title recorded on the HDD to a disc differs depending on the recording mode of the title and the disc to copy Title in DR mode Ei Title can be copied at high speed Title in HG HX HE or HL modes Ei Title can be copied at high speed Title in XP SP LP EP or FR modes GW Title can be copied at high speed Title cannot be copied at high speed R Title can be copied at high speed if Recording Format for DVD was set to Video format before the programme is recorded to HDD from external input The default setting is Video format gt 101 But in the following cases high speed mode does not work E EGM Titles recorded in EP mode and FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode F Titles recorded in 16 9 aspect EJ EAM Titles recorded in 16 9 aspect using EP mode or FR recordings 5 hours or longer mode Playing the disc on other players Parental Control
291. ss gt Copy Destination Capacity 4366 MB Size 0 MB 0 4 Copy Direction HDD BD DVD Title 2 Copy Mode Yor item Total 0 g Create List Start Copying Page 01 01 C Qormon Create copy list onerum 2 Press A W to select New item then press OK 3 Press A V to select the title then press IM A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary items Press II again to cancel The items will be copied in the order of the copying list If you want to specify the order repeat selecting one item at a time To view other pages Press ld lt d gt gt Press OK To edit the copying list gt right You cannot start copying when the value of the Size exceeds 100 Destination Capacity is not sufficient gt 62 About the data size for copying Press lt 4 to confirm O Set other settings If you are not going to change these settings press Y twice gt step Q Press A W to select Other Settings then press gt Subtitles Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording mode other than High Speed is selected 2 Press A W to select Subtitles then press OK 3 Press A W to select Automatic or Off then press OK e If Automatic is selected Subtitle selected in Preferred Subtitles in the Setup menu gt 99 will be copied The copie
292. standby Off Software Licence Information about software licence is displayed DivX Registration You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video on Demand VOD content gt 52 Initialize Press OK to show the following settings Shipping Condition This returns Setup menus to default settings except for the ratings level PIN Owner ID and Clock setting etc Yes No e The timer recording programmes are also cancelled PIN for BD Video playback DVD Video playback Child Lock Parental Control and VIERA CAST Default Settings This returns Setup menus to default settings except for the programmed channels time settings disc language settings ratings level PIN Owner ID and remote control code etc Yes No PIN for BD Video playback DVD Video playback Child Lock Parental Control and VIERA CAST RQT9430 Convenient Functions Other Settings HOLD function The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote control Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit Press and hold OK and BACK RETURN s at the same time until X HOLD appears on the unit s display If you press a button while the HOLD function is on X HOLD appears on the unit s display and operation is impossible Tips To cancel the HOLD function Press and hold OK and BACK RETURN 5 at the same time until X HOLD disappears
293. t 47 G0 Only the audio selected in Multi Audio AD in the Disc menu will be copied for the multiple audio gt 88 Subtitle displayed during playback will be copied gt 47 OSs A V to select Copy Title Playing th aying then Q lt P to select Start then Tips To stop copying Press and hold BACK RETURN 5 for 3 seconds To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 Recording and playing while copying You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying e Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played e To confirm the current progress Press STATUS N A RQT9430 Speed and recording mode when copying Titles in DR HG HX HE or HL mode Copy destination Copy speed Recording mode High speed Same as title to be copied RAM Normal speed FR R 1 When copying over the available space on the disc one from HG HX HE or HL modes will be selected to match the available space and it will be copied with normal speed Titles in XP SP LP EP or FR mode Copy destination Copy speed Recording mode Normal speed Recording mode of playing back title RAM High speed Same as title to be copied R High speed Same as title to be copied 1 When the copy destination disc does not have enough space copy will perform at normal speed in
294. t folders cannot be registered on the same list Still Picture 75 gi RQT9430 Deleting still pictures Once deleted the recorded contents are lost and cannot be Tips restored Make certain before proceeding To reium ioth i o return to the previous screen m EES GW Ee Press BACK RETURN 4 7 To exit the screen Preparation Press EXIT e Press DRIVE SELECT to select the drive Select BD for any discs EARM EX Release protection disc gt 94 card gt 23 While stopped D A Y to select Delete then C m a GW When PICTURE is not selected press the Green button to select PICTURE HDD RAM Press OPTION Press A V to select Album View or Pictures by Date then press OK Eh i Pictures by Date ime Remaining 20 08 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC a Press OK to display pictures Page 01 01 eruan E voeo Picture Belsting a stil picture Press A V lt gt to select the item which contains the still picture to delete then press OK Press A V lt gt to select the still picture then press OK Deleting the album date folder Press A V lt gt to select the album date folder you want to delete Press DEL You can confirm the still picture that you have selected using the option menu gt 71 Properties step 2 To sh
295. t has an internal database containing information for approximately e g USB MP3 350 000 album titles E y P Copy Video AVCHD If the title of the newly released music CD is not in the built in Copy Video MPEG2 database it is possible to acquire the title automatically by See ERT connecting to the network via the Internet gt 115 Play Copy Music MP3 USB device is inserted If there are music CDs with very similar title information _ then the incorrect title information may be obtained If no title i i a a ti PT Play Video DivX suggestions are found it is displayed as Unknown Artist Play Pictures JPEG Unknown Album Play Copy Music MP3 J 2 CD is inserted In these cases enter the music CD title information manually o ORETURN after recording to the HDD has completed 7 z 7 Display items differ depending on what is Copying music from a disc or a USB recorded in each media memory 12 Blue R TE mA i e ele Music CD AIl tracks in the CD will be recorded e g faa Music CD EJ ME MP3 All tracks in the folder will be eT eel recorded Cannot record track by track hc col No Track Name Artist Playing track 0t March Moon Leon la 02 Do this flower open Leon 03 Goto there from here Leon 04 Goodby SAKURA LeonT o5 if eastern wind has gone Leon I e It will be recorded as 1 album to the HDD in 1 recordin
296. t have a region code number be played Please tell me about disc compatibility with this unit e The region management information for BD Video DVD Video indicates that the disc conforms to industry standards You cannot play discs that do not conform to industry standards or do not have a region code or number e Refer to HDD and Disc Handling 118 RQT9430 Recording Page Can record from a commercially Most commercially sold video cassette Blu ray Disc and DVD are copy purchased video cassette Blu ray protected therefore recording is usually not possible Disc or DVD Can the disc recorded on the unit e Refer to Play on other players in HDD and Disc Handling 20 21 be played on other equipment Can high speed copy to a disc e Yes you can But you may not high speed copy depending on the disc to 57 copy or the title Depending on the disc type the maximum speed varies Is it possible to copy to the disc e It can be copied to the disc SD card or USB memory after It can be copied with HD quality copying HD video AVCHD format RWM Hy It will be copied with SD quality It to the HDD cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality e It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory MPEG 2 or AVCHD files are not e Only MPEG 2 or AVCHD on a Panasonic s video camera etc will be recognised recognised MPEG 2 or AVCHD copied to USB me
297. t the AV2 input terminal of this unit to VCR Scart Terminal of a SKY Digital STB satellite cable receiver with a 21 pin scart cable gt 112 e Set the AV2 Input and Ext Link to match the connected equipment in the Setup menu gt 105 Make timer programming on SKY Digital STB satellite cable receiver Refer to the equipment s operating instructions sect to select the HDD drive EXT LINK EXT L lights on the unit s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated The guidance information of EXT LINK appears Tips To set external link standby using the FUNCTION MENU display Perform step gt above 1 Press FUNCTION MENU 2 Press A W to select Others then press OK 3 Press A V to select Ext Link Standby then press OK 4 Press lt gt to select Yes then press OK To cancel the external control Turn on this unit 2 Press EXT LINK to stop recording or to cancel linked timer recording standby EXT L disappears Notes e During EXT LINK standby mode or recording you cannot press INPUT SELECT to select external input other than AV2 e In order to prevent accidental operation press EXT LINK to cancel the setting after recording is finished e This function does not work when TV System is set to NTSC in the Setup menu gt 104 e This function does not work with some equi
298. te then press OK to confirm Notes e You may not be able to specify start and end points within 3 seconds of each other e Available disc space may not increase after erasing short parts of titles Divide Title HDD RAM You can divide a title into two Once divided titles cannot be recombined Perform steps of Accessing the Title View gt 53 O Press A V to select Divide Title then press OK RQT9430 O Press gt PLAY and Ill to set the point you want to divide Q Press A V to select Divide then press OK For quicker editing gt 55 Tips Selecting Preview then pressing OK plays the title from 10 seconds prior to 10 seconds after the division point To change the point to divide at Perform steps again O Press A V to select Continue then press OK O Press lt 4 to select Divide then press OK The title is divided at that point Enter Title Name DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title SHD Time Remaining 20 08 DR VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC Set up Protection Divide Cancel Protection Partial Delete Divide Title Preview Continue Change Thumbnail DR File Conversion Notes e A short amount of video and audio just before and after the division point get cut out e You cannot div
299. te the disc writing software files tracks and folders may not play in the order you numbered them e This unit is not compatible with packet write format e Depending on the recording conditions the disc may not play Notes e Specifications are subject to change without notice e Useable capacity will be less SD card 1 Remove the disc from cartridge case TYPE1 cannot be used 2 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback 3 ISO9660 level 1 or 2 except for extended formats and Joliet This unit is compatible with multi session border except for DVD R DL This unit is not compatible with packet write format 4 Includes miniSD cards A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted Includes microSD cards A microSD adaptor needs to be inserted 5 Long file name is unsupported 6 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from SD card to HDD or DVD RAM disc After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD RAM disc is completed the playback becomes possible 7 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB device to HDD or DVD RAM disc After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD RAM disc is completed the playback becomes possible 8 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB device to HDD BD RE SL DL or BD R SL DL disc After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD BD RE SL DL or BD R SL DL disc is completed the playback bec
300. te unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy If there is not enough space available on the HDD If you will copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode recording is necessary If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 499 e You cannot record and copy on finalised discs However you can record and copy again if you format ENNEN e Due to peculiarities of EJ you may be unable to record onto or edit them if you either insert and remove the disc or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded a total of 30 times e The discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders e Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be able to be recorded to e This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings However both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed e Some broadcasts are copyright protected e Some programmes on freesat channels are copy restricted and the number of times you can copy in DR HG HX HE HL mode is assigned by the broadcaster 95 33 32 53 95 101 32 53 104 33 Part or all of a recorded title has been lost e If the power shuts down or the AC mains lead is disconnected from the household mains socket while
301. th HDCP set to Off In this case some programmes BD Video or DVD Video cannot be seen VIERA Link On Off Select when you do not want to use HDAVI Control x1 Depending on the connected equipment some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected or you may not be able to change the settings 2 Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference a S a e 8 RQT9430 Functions Network Settings gt Setup Naa gt Others gt 97 Accessing the Setup Menu All factory default settings are indicated with Underlined text Network Settings A Y select Network Settings gt menor sonas a C IP Address DNS Settings Proxy Server Settings Network Service IP Address DNS Settings gt 109 e Press OK to show the following settings Connection Test IP Address Auto assignment On Off IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DNS IP Auto assignment On Off Primary DNS Secondary DNS Connection Speed Auto configure On Off Connection Speed Setting This is enabled only when Connection Speed Auto configure is turned Off 10BASE half duplex 100BASE half duplex 10BASE full duplex 100BASE full duplex RQT9430 Proxy Server Settings gt 110 e Press OK to show the following settings Initialize Set the setting of th
302. that they be viewed on a widescreen television 16 9 aspect ratio so images often don t fit regular 4 3 aspect ratio televisions Two styles of picture Pan amp Scan and Letterbox deal with this problem Pan amp Scan The sides are cut off so the picture fills the screen Letterbox Black bands appear at the top and bottom of the picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect ratio of 16 9 Progressive Interlace Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the image in 2 phases by splitting the display into odd and even scans Progressive will display whole image in 1 scan Therefore it will give high definition image without flickering compared with interlace Protection You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or deletion protection Router Distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device such as the PC and relays the flow of data within the network RGB This refers to the three primary colours of light red R green G and blue B and also the method of producing video that uses them By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission noise is reduced for even higher quality images Sampling frequency Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave analogue signal samples taken at set periods into digits digital encoding Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per second so larger numbers mean
303. the Favourites Only when no channels have been added to the Favourites 2 Press OK to store the Favourites To delete channels on Favourites focus on a channel of the Favourites column 2 Press A W to select the channel in the Favourites column then press the Yellow button e Repeat this step to delete other channels e Press the Blue button to delete all channels from the Favourites Press OK to store the Favourites Deleting a channel from a Favourites does not affect the channel itself You can still select the channel from the All freesat Channels column 1 While the Favourites Editor screen is displayed press lt gt to Tuning Convenient Functions RQT9430 Channel Settings freesat Channel List You can set channel list of freesat 1 Press A V to select freesat Channel List then press OK freesat Channel List 2 Press A V to select the channel To hide unwanted channels Press OK The check mark disappears You cannot select it by pressing A V CH But you can select it by pressing the numbered buttons to enter the channel number directly Press OK again to reveal freesat Auto Setup You can restart auto setting for freesat channels if the setup gt 13 fails for some reason However if you perform freesat Auto Setup all channel settings are deleted Confirm the programme you set the timer recor
304. the main unit e Remove dust from the transmission window and the unit s sensor e Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception transmission e Don t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sun exposure e It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries 108 e The HOLD function is activated 108 e Software is updating when UPD O D is displaying on the unit s display Wait 111 until the update is completed The unit is on but cannot be e Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly 26 27 operated e Some operations are prohibited by the disc e The unit is warm U59 appears on the unit s display Wait until U59 disappears 120 U88 is displayed and the disc cannot be ejected Cannot eject a disc e The unit is carrying out the recovery process The disc may be defective Do the following to eject the disc Try another disc 1 Press 0 1 on the main unit to switch to standby mode If the unit doesn t switch to standby mode reset the unit gt 122 To restore the unit if it freezes 2 While the unit is turned in standby press and hold I and CH A on the main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds Ejection may take extra time depending on discs e The unit is recording e The unit may have a problem Eject the disc as in 2 above e Linked timer recordings with external
305. tion To tune to other satellites manually gt 98 V to select Search Mode 10 lt gt to select the search mode You can select the search mode from the followings All All channels including encrypted channels will be searched e Free channels Y to select Channel Type 16 RQT9430 lt P to select the channel type You can select the channel type from the followings e All All channels including TV Radio Data etc will be searched e TV e Radio 13 OS to start the Auto Setup Go to step when you select All in step It takes time Please follow the instruction on the screen This unit is checking signals during displaying Please wait Locked appears when the checking is finished Both DISH Other Satellite Auto Setup Satellite Selection Astra2 Eurobird Satellite Selection Search Mode Channel Type DISH Input 1 Signal Quality DISH Input 1 Signal Senon Lo oOo DISH Input 1 Sianal Lock DISH Input 2 Signal a DISH Input 2 Signal a DISH Input 2 Signal Lock The bar appears beside Signal Quality and Signal Strength when the signal is input IN 1 and 2 are checking the signals when both terminals are connected e If Locked does not appears the signal is weak and Auto Setup will not start Check that the satellite dish is correctly positioned and correct
306. title recorded on both layers the unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme However video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers BD Video or DVD Video is not played e You have set a ratings level to limit BD Video or DVD Video play Change this setting e Ensure the disc is for the correct BD Video region code or DVD Video region number and is not defective You cannot playback while recording in recording mode other than DR mode 100 Cover Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be selected e The languages are not recorded on the disc e You may not be able to use the on screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on some discs Use the disc s menus to make changes e After conversion from DR mode or copy to disc in mode other than DR it is not possible to switch soundtrack and subtitles No subtitles e Subtitles are not recorded on the HDD or disc e Turn the subtitles on Set Subtitles on the on screen menu to On e Subtitles are not recorded in the following cases When the Subtitle on the on screen menu is set to Off and a DR mode programme on HDD is converted to a different mode When the Subtitle on the on screen menu is set to Off and a DR mode programme on HDD is copied onto a disc with a different mode Angle cannot be changed This function depends on sof
307. titles to disc e Quality and speed of copy depends on the type of disc being used Copy in high definition for long recording time BD RE BD R Other discs Copy in standard definition HG HX HE HL mode _ XP SP LP EP FR mode _ e Only one subtitle and one audio can e Only one subtitle and one audio can be copied be copied e Copy as high definition HD quality e Copy as standard definition SD quality with compressed high definition data e Copy in Normal Speed mode e Copy in Normal Speed mode when copying the title recorded in DR mode on HDD Data size of the copied title may be larger than the original title depending on the transfer rate It is recommended to use HE or HL mode when you record high definition and long programmes 2You cannot switch the subtitle or audio description on or off during playback of the copied title Notes e Some programmes are copy restricted and the number of times you can copy in HD quality is assigned by the broadcaster gt 33 Copy restriction on freesat programmes e Teletext and Digital TEXT MHEG cannot be recorded RQT9430 HDD and Disc Handling HDD and discs you can use for recording and play O Possible Impossible Disc type Hard disk drive HDD HDD Video Still picture Music Standard symbol Data that can be recorded and played Qual
308. to stop recording or cancel linked timer FINISH e The software update is completed 111 GUIDE e TV Guide data is being downloaded 44 HARD ERR e f there is no change after turning the unit on and off consult the dealer where the unit was purchased NoERAS e You cannot delete items on this disc The disc may be damaged Use a new disc NoREAD e The disc is dirty or badly scratched The unit cannot record play or edit 117 e The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality 20 22 e You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished operation Press 7 4 OPEN CLOSE on the main unit to eject the disc NoWRIT e You cannot write to this disc The disc may be damaged Use a new disc PLEASE WAIT e Displayed when the unit is started or when turned to standby This is not a malfunction e The unit is carrying out its recovery process You cannot operate the unit while the message is displayed PROG FULL e There are already 32 timer recording programmes Delete unnecessary timer recording programmes 41 REMOVE e The USB device is drawing too much power Remove the USB device START e Update of the software is started 111 You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete SW DL e The unit is performing a software update Download will stop when the power is turned on or the timer recording starts UNFORMAT e You inserted an unformatted DVD RAM DVD RW RW an unused BD R R R DL or DVD
309. tons To access more features on YouTube or Picasa Web Albums site enter your user ID and password that you have previously set up with these sites through the internet on your PC However not all features may be accessible through VIERA CAST VIERA CAST Home screen After you access YouTube or Picasa Web Albums from the VIERA CAST Home screen and add your favourite videos or albums to VIERA CAST you can choose them easily from the Home screen Images are for illustration change without notice Regarding Settings Set VIERA CAST Home screen e My Account You can remove your account from the unit e Lock Enter a password to lock YouTube and Picasa Web Albums e Notices Tips To return to VIERA CAST Home screen Press VIERA CAST To exit Press EXIT e Set Network Lock to On to restrict using VIERA CAST gt 106 e Set Automatic Volume Control to Off when the audio is warped while using VIERA CAST gt 110 e When display of the contents is truncated set Picture Zoom to Out gt 110 Notes e VIERA CAST home screen is subject to change without notice e The services through VIERA CAST are operated by their respective service providers and service may be discontinued either temporarily or permanently without notice Therefore Panasonic will make no warranty for the content or the continuity of the services e All features of websites or content
310. ts HDAVI Control 4 function HDAVI Control 4 is the newest standard current as of December 2008 for Panasonic s VIERA Link compatible equipment This standard is compatible with Panasonic s conventional HDAVI equipment e Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers equipment supporting VIERA Link function When the TV is on Easy playback VIERA Link When the TV is on and the following operations are performed the TV s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode S30 Wiis or AV input mode WWE and the TV displays the corresponding action Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds Press FUNCTION MENU gt PLAY DIRECT NAVIGATOR GUIDE PROG CHECK etc When the TV is off Power on link VIERA Link Preparation 1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully wired 21 pin Scart cable gt 10 or to your receiver using an HDMI cable gt 114 2 Set VIERA Link to On 105 The default setting is On 3 Set the HDAVI Control operations on the connected equipment e g TV e Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be used as HDAVI Control 4 Turn on all HDAVI Control compatible equipment and select this unit s input channel on the connected TV so that the HDAVI Control function works properly Also when the connection or settings ar
311. tware availability Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded You have forgotten your ratings PIN You want to cancel the ratings level With the tray open press DRIVE SELECT to select the BD drive then press and hold REC and gt x1 3 on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or more seconds The PIN and the ratings level return to the factory preset 0000 Quick View Play x1 3 does not work Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR mode titles or ENTA This does not work while recording in XP or FR mode The resume play function does not work Memorized positions are cancelled when open the disc tray EBJ EEJ turn off the power ENA Memorized positions will not be cancelled Resume play does not work for some BD Video disc that contain BD J Time Slip Manual Skip etc do not work Slow motion playback does not go reverse Reverse frame by frame does not work properly These functions do not work with finalised discs Time Slip does not work when the unit s TV System settings are different from the title recorded on the disc Slow motion playback in reverse does not work for title that has copied the AVCHD and ENAT Reverse frame by frame cannot be done Frame by frame backward for titles that have copied the AVCHD will be reversed in 10 frame units Slow motion and frame by frame do not work with the title recorded f
312. u gt 103 e Set Dolby D Dolby D Dolby TrueHD or DTS DTS HD to Bitstream or PCM in the Setup menu gt 103 About audio from audio output terminal Connect an amplifier receiver and confirm the desired audio type and necessary settings BD Video Secondary Audio Dolby D Dolby D Dolby TrueHD or DTS DTS HD e The number of channels listed is the maximum possible number of output channels e Also depending on the specifications or the settings of the amplifier receiver the results of the output may vary Terminal HDMI AV OUT DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Dolby D Dolby D Dolby TrueHD Bitstream PCM s Bitstream PCM DTS DTS HD Dolby Digital ree Dolby Digital ap Dolby Digital ioi Dolby Digital ae 5 1ch PCM Dolby Digital ae Dolby Digital EX Bee a Dolby Digital Plus a tal 1ch PCM 7 1ch PCM Dolby Digital Dolby Digita Dolby TrueHD 5 1ch PC ch PC olby Digita DTS Digital DTS Digital 5 1ch PCM DTS Digital Surround DTS Surround m Surround Down mixed 2ch ES 6 DTS ES 7 1ch PCM DTS ES PCM DTS HD High DTS Digital Resolution Audio seh DTS Digital Surround DTS HD Master Zeh PCM Surround Audio Down mixed Down mixed Down mixed 2ch 5 1ch PCM a 5 1ch PCM 2 ae PCM 1 When the connected equipment is not supported with these audio format the audio is output as Dolby Digital bitstream DTS Digital Surroun
313. u play this content the remaining number of plays is displayed You cannot play this content when the number of remaining plays is zero Rental Expired is displayed When playing this content e The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if you press o you press W you press DIRECT NAVIGATOR you press M d or lt lt gt gt etc and arrive at another content or the start of the content being played timer recording starts on the HDD you press DRIVE SELECT to change the drive e Resume functions work The number of plays is not reduced when you restart by resume play function RQT9430 Titles Editing HDD RAM R You can not edit finalised discs Only Properties is possible You can edit titles on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen deleting unwanted parts of titles such as commercials changing Thumbnail dividing and deleting titles etc Accessing the Title View Preparation BD RE GYM Release protection gt 94 Setting Protection 1 Press DRIVE SELECT to select the drive Press DIRECT NAVIGATOR EM Ea N When VIDEO is not selected press the Red button to select VIDEO Press A V to select a title Multiple editing gt below Tips Press OPTION to display the menu list e To view more options Press A W to select Edit then press OK e Items that cannot be selected are grey
314. ubleshooting Guide General Issues Picture Page The images from the unit do not appear on the TV Picture is distorted e Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly e Try connecting an alternative cable e Make sure recorder is connected to an appropriate AV input of the TV e Make sure the TV s input setting e g HDMI 1 is correct e The TV isn t compatible with progressive signals Press and hold W and gt x1 3 on the main unit for about 5 seconds The setting will change to interlace e The TV isn t compatible with RGB signals Set AV1 Output in the Setup menu to Video with component e The unit s TV System setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing While stopped keep pressing I and A OPEN CLOSE on the main unit for 5 or more seconds The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa e When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable use a disc that matches with this unit s TV system e Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables Reduce the number of connected devices e After changing the HDCP on HDMI Output setting turn the power of this unit off once and turn it back on 10 11 112 113 114 10 11 112 113 105 104 Television reception worsens after connecting the unit e This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment It can be solved by usi
315. ug it from the household mains socket This unit consumes a small amount of power even when it is turned in standby approx 0 4 W Power Save is set to On RQT9430 Basic Connection When your Television does not have an HDMI input terminal In this setting you cannot enjoy HDTV in HD picture quality The resolution will be 576i 480i TV To household mains socket This unit mums 21 pin Scart cable not supplied Connect only after all other connections are complete After completing the connections proceed to the TV Tuning gt 13 e Refer to page 120 if U50 U50 1 or U50 2 appears on the unit s display Notes e The freesat channel uses Astra 2 at 28 2 East and Eurobird 1 at 28 5 East satellites To ensure your satellite dish is correctly installed please consult your freesat registered dealer e If you connect 2 satellite dishes for different satellites e g DISH IN 1 Astra 28 2 DISH IN 2 Astra 19 2 the unit cannot receive the signal correctly e You can use the unit as one tuner when connecting DISH IN 1 to a satellite dish that can receive SKY Tips e You can check the satellite signal condition using Signal Condition in the Setup menu gt 98 e Additional Connections gt 112 RQT9430 Auto Set Up freesat Search and store TV programmes automatically These steps are not necessary if the setup has been completed by your local de
316. unit stopped APIGA FNCTONNEW Hoo Time Remaining 30 00 DR Playback amp AOK Gy 5 AO RETURN V to select Delete then i DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles Time Remaining 45 54 DR VIDEO POTURE MUSIC MPIGA NIONE x00 Tine Remaining fh a 2505 Og a omn R 01 06 AVI ia 00 0R P Not viewed oK azi moe iS iCTURE 12 96 Bom And Bed Aral 2 1 S ORETURN mA Eeicia GW When VIDEO is not selected press the Red button to select VIDEO To view other ence Press kd lt d gt gt A Y to select the title then ie A check mark is displayed Repeat this step until you select all necessary items e Press IE again to cancel 5 4 to select Delete then Delete Titles During Playback 1 During playback 2 lt to select Delete then S RQT9430 DEL SKP Notes e You cannot delete while copying at Normal Speed Even if you have set protection on other equipment such titles are deleted Tips To return to the previous screen Press BACK RETURN 5 Epp GYM Deleting an item increases the available disc space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted G R Available disc space does not increase after deletion Available disc space increases when you delete the last title If you format the disc all of the disc space will b
317. using a different encoding system from that of 104 TV system is different from the the TV system currently selected on the unit setting Alter the TV System setting on this unit to suit To playback please change the TV System in Setup Cannot record to the disc e The disc may be dirty or scratched 117 Unable to format Cannot play on this unit e You tried to play a non compatible image 135 e Turn the unit off and re insert the card 117 Cannot record Disc is full By RAM Create space by deleting unwanted titles Even if 32 53 you delete recorded content from the BD R DVD R DVD R DL R or R DL 95 101 there is no increase in disc space Available recording space on a DVD RW Cannot record Maximum number DVD Video format or RW disc increases when the last title is deleted of titles exceeded space may increase slightly when you delete other titles e Use a new disc No Disc e The disc is upside down If it is a single sided disc insert it so the label is facing up 117 No folders e There is no compatible folder in this unit 136 No SD CARD e The card is not inserted If this message is displayed with a compatible card 117 No valid SD card already inserted turn off the unit remove and then re insert the card e The format of the card inserted is incomplete 23 e MPEG 2 or AVCHD will only be recognised when recorded on to the card from Panasonic s video camera etc e Files on the card are not of the right type
318. utomatically or if the top menu does not display automatically press gt PLAY to start e Even if you copy a high quality video audio DVD the original picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated e If you want to copy a title from a DVD RW DVD Video Recording format create a copying list and then copy gt 61 Copying using the copying list Copy RQT9430 Recording from a Satellite or Cable Receiver Manual Recording Preparation e Connect a satellite or cable receiver to this unit s input terminals gt 112 e When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC change the TV System to NTSC in the Setup menu gt 104 amp With the unit stopped siim to select AV2 for the satellite or cable receiver you have connected 2 scr to select the HDD drive REC MODE o to select the recording mode DR HG HX HE HL FR mode cannot be selected Select the channel on the satellite or cable receiver REC i O Cezy to start recording Tips To skip unwanted parts Press II to pause recording Press again to restart recording To stop recording Press Ml 64 RQT9430 Linked timer recordings with external equipment SKY Digital STB satellite cable receiver EXT LINK To record programmes from a SKY Digital STB satellite cable receiver using timer programming Preparation e Make sure you connec
319. when you have connected equipment through the unit s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal gt 114 Press OK to show the following settings PCM Down Conversion Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the above settings if the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz or the disc has copy protection or BD Video Secondary Audio is set to On ERR On Signals are converted to 48 kHz Choose when the connected equipment cannot process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz Off Signals are output as 96 kHz Choose when the connected equipment can process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz Dolby D Dolby D Dolby TrueHD DTS DTS HD MPEG Select to output Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS Digital Surround DTS HD High Resolution Audio DTS HD Master Audio or MPEG as bitstream or PCM Notes e Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be harmful to your ears and speakers and audio will not be recorded properly on media such as mini discs Refer to the operating instructions for connected equipment to verify whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats e If the unit is connected with the HDMI AV OUT terminal the specifications of the connected equipment take preference over this unit and audio selected in these items may not be output e g when a television is conne
320. with the numbered buttons lt to select Hour and Min and A to set the recording time You can also set the recording time with the 3 numbered buttons Start play on the other equipment O Start play on the other equipment With Other Equipment O When you want to start recording lt gt to select Start then When you want to start recording to select Start then OKs lt gt OS Tips Tips To return to the previous screen without recording Press BACK RETURN 5 To return to the previous screen without recording Press BACK RETURN 5 To exit the screen without recording Press EXIT To exit the screen without recording Press EXIT To stop recording partway Press W To stop recording partway Press I To show the remaining time Press STATUS To show the remaining time Press STATUS Notes Notes e You cannot record more than 8 hours e EG It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times of step Q recording or editing ty R After finalising chapters for every 5 minutes will be created After finalising chapters for every 8 minutes will be created 67 e Regardless of top menu chapters for every 8 minutes will be created RQT9430 Copying HD Video AVCHD format It is possible to copy the HD video AVCHD format recorded on the Panasonic s video camera etc to the HDD or disc From an SD card
321. ye Aha ee kals 94 Still Picture ews poke ek dea bee eee ee eS 73 ARNG es aa ws pom alana ler A heya e E ais moe ncaa 54 QUICK ViIOW sic rryrrosipnc eae On dees 46 Ratings level BD Vid6O radari oi dat eea dhe ea Ea A E wins 100 DVD VidGOS taada tite detained crna anal e aea anna 100 Recording ASPOCh npari seis anid Ra draw vehdag a och nana Meenas ans 101 Flexible Recording via AV input 000 67 Important NOTES e reene ieu by eee ee a Oe ere ote 33 34 MOUE ceansa rist cin ind Pe bebe tianka huni aneda 35 Recording via AV3 input 00 0 0 02 0008 67 VAMC Ted eee id raaa i aR a AE EE E Ea 28 29 Remote Control Code 0eeeeeeeeeeeeerees 122 Repeat Play acces icici tie aitseie sere aca e en aacaie sis eave ia itas 89 Resume Play Function 0000 c eee eee eee 26 SD Card Copy HD Video 2 2 3 otinece acide bid r aad 68 Copy SD VIJO srap arinek i ee dee caveee cba ds 69 Copy still picture 2 eve eur ieee dee hee Ea ches 74 OWA sie dctis sea dale asses E ate ane incl ay E U EE yh mts a Socal ae 95 Play HD video aana 0 cect eee 48 Play still picture 2 kee 70 Slipported formats lt ire sce ease wads ca eal ete ee wanes 23 SD Video COPY aeeti ie ea bated de atea E hee Se 69 Select Channel WOCSAlb ss fait aw aah sua as Cha Rae E ae aE E Rada 24 Other satellite service 0 2 e eee eee 25 Setup MON cr roterar ecran Tam n a oe ee EEN S aie cue 97 Simultaneous Record and Pl
322. ype playing may automatically start without pressing gt PLAY e The unit takes some time to read the disc before play starts e Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed Press I when you finish to preserve the unit s motor and your television screen e If appears on the TV the operation is prohibited by the unit or disc Recording Television Programmes EI Refer to Important Notes for Recording gt 33 to 34 and Advanced Recording gt 35 to 38 for detailed information on recording This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode Preparation Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is connected to SELECT Q Q to turn the unit on Ea l n a few times and select the HDD drive a few times and select freesat or Other T Sat then CJ aa CS CH NN to select desired channel V 2 Basic Operations To select with the numbered buttons gt 24 for freesat 25 for other satellite services To record 2 programmes simultaneously gt 36 REC ey to start recording When REC is pressed while a drive other than the HDD is selected it will automatically switch to HDD and start the recording Pausing Recording Stopping Recording Press II Press I REC Press again to restart recording e The title is not divided 27 RQT9430 Timer Recording Using the TV

Panasonic DMR-BS750 Blu-ray Disc Recorder

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents